JP7172858B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2014-045989 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides an advantageous transition means for shifting to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player;
means for terminating the advantageous game state when the remaining continuation reference number becomes "0" as the game is executed in the advantageous game state;
A lottery process for determining whether or not to increase the remaining continuation reference number and a value for increasing the remaining continuation reference number each time a lottery execution opportunity occurs until a lottery ending opportunity occurs in the grant target game an increase lottery means for executing an increase lottery process, which is at least one of the lottery processes to be performed;
The remaining continuation criteria based on the result of the increased lottery process executed until the notification opportunity occurs based on the occurrence of the notification opportunity in the situation where the lottery end opportunity has not occurred in the grant target game a predetermined notification means for notifying an increase in the number;
Determination means for determining whether the game is to be the grant target game when the game is started;
means for giving a corresponding number at the time of decision to the remaining continuation reference number when the deciding means decides to make the given game;
means for notifying that the corresponding number at the time of determination has been granted when the determination means determines that the game is to be the award target game;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through the display window; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) It is a front view of a common display area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on a combined display part. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit; FIG. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing bet handling processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting process at the time of start executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a lottery process for a winning combination executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when betting 3 coins; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when two cards are bet; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order in which the reels are stopped and the winning mode to be established; 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game state and the game section that exist in the slot machine. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first section and the second section, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state in the second section. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB combination and the second CB combination, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state and the second CB state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CB performed by main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the game state shifts to the CB state and how the shift to the CB state is restricted. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of notification related to winning states of the first CB and second CB hands. (a) to (j) are time charts showing how various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet. It is a flowchart which shows the internal information control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing at the time of the supply start performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for non-internal medium information performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st CB inside information processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd CB internal middle alerting|reporting performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area of a main RAM; (a) It is a flowchart which shows the all clear processing performed by the main side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the partial clear processing which is performed by the main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how partial clear processing and full clear processing are executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing advantageous lottery processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by main side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the image display device when the first start command is received; (b) is for explaining the display content of the image display device when the second start command is received; is an explanatory diagram of . (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order in which the reels are stopped and the combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the main line in the event of a loss in the winning combination lottery process; and (b) the winning combination lottery process. is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the combination of symbols that can be stopped on the main line when the index value=16 is won at . (a), (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the main line in the case of a winning result in the winning lottery process, and (c) , (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the main line when the index value=16 is won in the winning lottery process. (a) is the reel stop result that a transition to a pseudo-bonus state occurs in the case where the lottery process for the role is lost in the final game of the transition waiting period, and that the type of the pseudo-bonus state is a big bonus. (b) In the final game of the transition waiting period, when the winning lottery process is lost, a transition to a pseudo-bonus state occurs and a pseudo-bonus FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the fact that the state type is a regular bonus is notified by the reel stop result; (a) A flowchart showing a bonus type determination process executed by the main MPU, and (b) a flowchart showing a third start setting process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the normal production|presentation control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing reel effect processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of reel effects. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is notified using the reel stop result. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing advantageous state processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT state processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various table groups provided in the effect-side ROM, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas of the effect-side RAM for reading the data table. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the base effect for the AT state, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the base effect for the additional period. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a data configuration of an AT data table; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for AT performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how pointer information to be referenced in the data tables stored in the first control area and the second control area is updated in the AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the loop lottery process performed by main side MPU. 7 is a flowchart showing loop addition processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the loop addition effect|action process performed by effect|presentation side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how an effect progresses when a loop lottery is executed by the main MPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of the image display device when an irregular game is executed in an AT state addition period; It is a flowchart which shows the process for irregularities performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process of the 2nd control area performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped by the execution of the irregular game. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the progress of the base effect for the ending period is not stopped and how it is stopped due to the execution of the irregular game. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various table groups provided in the effect-side ROM in the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanation for explaining various areas of the effect-side RAM for reading data tables. It is a diagram. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a predetermined type of irregular data table; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a first type of irregular effect, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a second type of irregular effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for irregularities performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing irregular processing executed by the effect-side MPU in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process of the 2nd control area performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing AT state processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining various table groups provided in the effect-side ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for AT performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the irregular processing at the time of a sign performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing an execution mode of effects when an irregular game occurs in the middle of the real precursor period or the false precursor period.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 11 so that the housing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with a shaft portion 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

A game panel 20 is provided near the upper center portion of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. there is Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20 as shown in FIG. When the start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of game media (or game value), which are either medals or virtual medals, are betted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. One game (game cycle) is performed until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is prohibited. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the front lower portion of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of game media is established on the main line ML, which will be described later. have. Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and a button for inserting two virtual medals at once. A second credit input button 48 is provided. In this slot machine 10, there are situations where the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be betted (that is, bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by three. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual tokens are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one.

If the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the current bet number and the bettable number, and the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the bet number will be the number of virtual medals. The number of virtual medals is increased, and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one.

When the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of stored virtual medals is one and the current bet number is "0", the bet number will be "1". At the same time, the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit insertion button 48 when the player operates the button. Thereby, the operability of the first credit insertion button 47 is enhanced.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . The slot machine 10 has a credit function of accumulating and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 58 as real medals.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIGS. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a set value of the slot machine 10 from "1" to "6". , a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and operated is provided.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, numbers "0" to "20" are assigned to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are visible from the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R of the main controller 70, which will be described later. It is a number for recognizing the symbol in a state of being in a bad state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 20th on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a “watermelon” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), and “ Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate in a state where a predetermined number or more of game media are betted, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving the game media. , the benefit of replaying, or the transition of the game state.

That is, in the present slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a straight line. Therefore, a subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. A subline SL3 connecting a connected subline SL2, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a lower pattern of the right reel 32R, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R. Winning is not established even if a winning combination is established on a straight line such as a sub-line SL4 connecting the upper symbols of .

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

The small winnings to which the game media are given include the first compensation winning, the second compensation winning, the third compensation winning, the fourth compensation winning, the fifth compensation winning, the sixth compensation winning, the seventh compensation winning, and the eighth compensation winning. There are supplemental prizes, ninth supplemental prizes, first bell prizes, second bell prizes, first watermelon prizes, second watermelon prizes and cherry prizes. Specifically, in the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, It will be the first supplementary prize. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the third compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the fourth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the fifth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Bell" symbol, the sixth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, the seventh compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the eighth compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the ninth compensation prize is won. becomes. If any one of the first to ninth supplementary prizes is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes “1”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first bell wins. becomes. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell wins. becomes. When either the first bell prize or the second bell prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “15”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. becomes. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second watermelon wins. becomes. When either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “5”. When the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is. In the case of winning a cherry prize, the number of game media to be given becomes “2”.

Winnings that give the privilege of replaying the next game without betting game media include normal replay winnings, first chance replay winnings, and second chance replay winnings. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the main line On the ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, on the main line ML When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, or the left reel on the main line ML. When the stopped symbol on the reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the normal replay prize is won. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first chance replay. Win a prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second chance replay. Win a prize.

If any of the above replay wins are made, a replay privilege is given that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins in the game in which "3" game media are betted, the betting of the game media is not required, and the next game is started with the "3" game media being betted. A game can be started. In addition, if any of the replay wins in the game in which the game medium "2" is betted, the play of the next game is started with the game medium "2" betted, while the game medium is not required to be wagered. It becomes possible to

A first CB prize and a second CB prize are available as state transition prizes in which only game state transitions are performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "White 7" symbol. If there is, it will be the 1st CB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol, 2CB award. When the first CB win is established, the game state shifts to the first CB state ST2, and when the second CB win is established, the game state shifts to the second CB state ST3 (see FIG. 22).

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are gaming states in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning of a minor combination stops on the main line ML, medals are paid out as a winning regardless of whether there is a winning combination. For example, even if the win flag corresponding to the first bell win is not set to "1", if the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell win stops on the main line ML, the game medium will be sent to the player. Granted. On the other hand, the replay winning prize is established on the condition that the corresponding combination is won in the lottery.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. In other words, in the non-CB state, reel control is performed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reels within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are controlled as described above, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the left reel 32L is not controlled. As for the left reel 32L, reel control is performed such that the left reel 32L is slid only up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated. That is, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the left reel 32L is reel-controlled to stop within a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the reel control to slide up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L. Control may be performed such that the game is slipped only up to the symbol, or reel control may be performed such that only predetermined reels are slipped for a maximum of one symbol. Further, the stop button operated in a certain order is controlled such that the reel corresponding to the stop button operated second or the stop button operated last is controlled to slide only up to one symbol. Reel control may be performed such that the reel corresponding to the .

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, when a winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is given priority, and when the replay winning is not possible, the first bell winning can be established. Also, the first bell winning can be established even when the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning has not been won.

Both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the relevant game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the relevant game state. It is a game state in which the number of is reduced. Details of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described later.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

Above the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that a sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display on the display surface images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of stored virtual medals, and a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals to be awarded when a small winning combination is won. When the number of game media is displayed and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, the display corresponding to the notified contents is performed, and furthermore, the management result of the game history is reported. and a section display section 67 for displaying a display corresponding to the fact that the game section is the second section. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 provided with a combined display section 66 and a section display section 67. FIG. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7(a), a combined display section 66 in which two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side, and a section display section composed of one light emitting section. 67 are aggregated.

When any of the small wins (1st to 9th compensation wins, 1st bell wins, 2nd bell wins, 1st watermelon wins, 2nd watermelon wins or cherry wins) corresponding to the provision of game media is established , the number of given game media corresponding to the small winning combination is displayed on the dual-use display section 66 at the end of the game in which the small winning combination has been established. Specifically, when any one of the first to ninth compensation winnings is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By being displayed, it is notified that the game medium of "1" has been provided. When either the first bell win or the second bell win is established in the non-CB state, "1" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By being displayed, it is notified that "15" game media have been provided. Further, when either the first watermelon winning prize or the second watermelon winning prize is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. It is notified that the game media of "5" have been awarded. In addition, when a cherry prize is won in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed, and "2" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. is given.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media awarded for winning a small winning combination is "1", as will be described later in detail. Therefore, when a small win is established in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By doing so, it is notified that the game medium of "1" has been awarded.

On the other hand, even if a winning such as a replay winning or a CB winning that does not give a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the winning is not displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. The 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of given game media on the dual-use display unit 66 is ended when the game media are betted to start the next game after the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at this bet timing. The devices 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the reported stop order is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-use display section 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order indicated by the image display device 63. The first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop. The stop order where the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order where the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are There is a stop order that is arbitrary and a stop order where the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order on the image display device 63 is made when a winning combination including the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth complementary winning data is won in the winning lottery process in the non-CB state. If you win a role that includes 2 bell winning data and any of the 7th to 9th complementary winning data, if you win a role that includes normal replay winning data, or if you do not win any role can be performed. Specifically, when winning a combination that includes the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth complementary winning data, the reel 32L is selected in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. , 32M, and 32R are stopped, the first bell winning is established, and if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order of stopping corresponding to the winning combination of this time, the first to sixth compensation winnings are established. Either can be established. When the first bell win is established, as already explained, "15" game media are given to the player. of game media is given to the player.

When a winning combination including the second bell winning data and any of the seventh to ninth complementary winning data is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are played in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order of stopping corresponding to the winning combination of this time, any one of the seventh to ninth complementary winnings is established. obtain. When the second bell win is established, as already explained, "15" game media are given to the player. of game media is given to the player.

When a winning combination including normal replay winning data is won, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined stop order out of the above stop orders, "Red 7" symbols and " A combination of "Red 7" and "Red 7" symbols is stop-displayed, and when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a specific stop order out of the above stop orders, "Red 7" symbols are displayed on the main line ML. , the combination of the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed. Further, when none of the winning combinations is won, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in a predetermined stop order out of the above stop orders, "red 7" symbols are displayed on the predetermined sub-lines SL1 to SL4. A combination of "red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols is stop-displayed, and when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in a specific stop order among the above stop orders, "red 7" symbols are displayed on the main line ML. , the "red 7" symbol and the combination of the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed.

When any one of the stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the dual-use display unit 66 is maintained in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification targets is performed. The contents of this display are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set so as to correspond to part or all of the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. good too.

The display contents of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 are different from the display contents to be displayed when the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-use display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the content of notification of the order of stopping on the image display device 63 and the content of display of the order of stopping on the dual-purpose display section 66. FIG.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, the combined display unit 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 8(b). An "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in the stopping order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display section 66 performs display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the display contents on the image display device 63 even if the display corresponding to the notification contents of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed on the combined display section 66 .

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display device 63 . In addition, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the side opposite to the image display device 63 with the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the combined display section 66 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63 , and this also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display section 66 .

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may start at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. is terminated when

The shared display section 66 is arranged on the central side of the common display area 68 , while the section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68 . The section display section 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the second section SC2 of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 (see FIG. 22). The second section SC2 includes the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result of notification of the stop order, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media awarded in one game") is 1 or more. It is a section in which an advantageous game state (specifically, a pseudo-bonus state ST4 and an AT state ST5) can be started and a section in which the advantageous game state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section SC1 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state does not start and does not continue.

The interval display section 67 is displayed when winning a combination with different winnings to be established according to the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or a combination with different winnings depending on the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the player to win a prize advantageous to the player is reported to the player, and in the case of an advantageous game state in which the expected value of acquisition of the game medium is 1 or more, the lighting state is set. Become. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 correspond to the advantageous gaming state, while the second section SC2, which is neither the pseudo-bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, does not correspond to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the first section SC1 shifts to the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. When the section display unit 67 is maintained in the off state when the transition to the second section SC2 is performed, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 is started in the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 is turned off from the off state. Lights up.

When the section display portion 67 is in the lighting state, the lighting state is maintained until the second section SC2 ends, and when the second section SC2 ends and transitions to the first section SC1, the section display section 67 is turned off. Become. Therefore, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1, the second section SC2 may be maintained. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 ends. However, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighted state, and when the second section SC2 ends, the section display section 67 is turned off.

As described above, once the section display section 67 is turned on in the second section SC2, the lighting state is maintained until the second section SC2 ends. The shared display unit 66 is turned on when a game medium is awarded and turned off when the next game starts, and the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on the image display device 63. When the game is finished, it is turned on and turned off when the game ends. Therefore, in a configuration in which the interval display portion 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous to the player, only the interval display portion 67 is displayed in the common display area 68 in the second interval SC2. It is possible to positively create a lighting state, which facilitates confirmation of the section display section 67 for the manager of the game hall.

Instead of maintaining the lighting state of the section display section 67 during the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may blink at a predetermined cycle during the second section SC2. Further, as the combined display section 66 and the section display section 67, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 as shown in FIG. The main controller 70 is attached to the back plate 11b that forms the rear portion of the housing 11. As shown in FIG. The main controller 70 is constructed by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81 . An MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71 . The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81 . Although the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in the board box 81 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 . Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and It is possible to see the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82 .

The substrate box 81 is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with an adhesive to prevent the case bodies from separating and to leave traces when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 81 . As a result, in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented by using some of the joints 83, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joints 83, another joint may be used after that. By connecting 83, separation of the case body can be prevented again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the connecting part 83 is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is being separated illegally by visually checking the connecting part 83. Become. A sealing seal 84 is attached to a side of the substrate box 81 other than the side on which the coupling portions 83 are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off during the separation of the case body, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70, as shown in FIG. The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 on the front door 12 . The effect control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70 . In addition, the production control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box in the same manner as the main control device 70 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main controller 70 as already described. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a first random number circuit 75 for sequentially updating the first random number within a predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a second random number based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit. A second random number circuit 76 that sequentially updates within a predetermined numerical range and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition, the MPU 72 also incorporates an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 72 includes the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, and a medal insertion sensor. Inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted through slot 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a and 48a for individually detecting operation of credit insertion buttons 47 and 48, and settlement detection sensor 51a for detecting operation of settlement button 51. , a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, a setting key detection sensor that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like. are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72 .

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector driving section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display section 66, the section display section 67, the effect control device 90, and the like. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. FIG. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is permitted, and to the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is prohibited. It has a function of ejecting to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. and a position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed when game media are awarded. Further, the MPU 72 performs display control of the section display unit 67 so that the notification of the second section SC2 is performed when the notification start trigger occurs in the case of the second section SC2. Further, the MPU 72 controls the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is displayed. In addition, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the effect control device 90 for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90 , while the direct display control of the combined display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72 . That is, for the image display device 63 that is subject to relatively complex display control, direct display control is performed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66 that is subject to relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72 for . As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the presentation and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72 .

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A power failure signal is output to the MPU 72 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing upon receiving the power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done.

The performance control device 90 includes a performance control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in.

It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 94 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply section of the power supply unit 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, but the RAM 94 is supplied with backup power. good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 as already described, and receives various commands from the MPU 72 . An upper lamp 61 , a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92 . Based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. let it happen.

In addition to the MPU 92, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the image display device 63 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63 . When the MPU 92 determines the execution contents of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 stores a drawing list indicating the contents of the image corresponding to each update timing in the VDP according to the determined execution contents of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the generated display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73 and the main RAM 74 respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 are respectively the effect side. They are referred to as an MPU 92, an effect-side ROM 93, and an effect-side RAM 94.

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization processing, interrupts by the timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72 . After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power has been turned on while the ON operation was performed using the setting key (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 was not pressed when the power was turned on (step S103: NO), After executing the partial clear process (step S104), the set value update process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), after executing all clear processing (step S105), set value update processing is executed (step S106). Partial clear processing (step S104) initializes a partial area of the main RAM 74, and all clear processing (step S105) initializes the entire area of the main RAM 74. FIG. The contents of these partial clear processing (step S104) and all clear processing (step S105) will be described later.

In the setting value update process, the current setting value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . When the set value update process is executed, since either the partial clear process (step S104) or the all clear process (step S105) has been executed before that, a credit is displayed at the start of the set value update process. A display corresponding to the fact that the set value is "1" is displayed in the portion 65. FIG. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value selected at that time becomes the set value set in the current set value update processing, and the set value update processing is terminated. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is ended. After that, the process shifts to normal processing (step S107). Normal processing will be described later in detail.

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal.

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure process at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 and returning the data saved in the main RAM 74 to the register of the main MPU 72, the register of the main MPU 72 The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Also, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). Thereafter, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 92 (step S113), the address before the power shutdown is restored (step S114).

Information indicating whether or not either first CB winning data or second CB winning data, which will be described later, is stored in the main RAM 74 is set in the power recovery command. That is, in step S113, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the first CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the first CB winning data is stored. is set to the effect side MPU 92. Further, in step S113, it is determined whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored. is set to the effect side MPU 92. Further, in step S113, when it is specified that both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored. A power recovery command in which information indicating that is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 .

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports are cleared. is turned off (step S116), and error notification processing is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). Then it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S202, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203, and the power failure processing is executed.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 . After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, the main MPU 72 performs an interrupt termination declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S206, a loop lottery process is executed for performing a lottery corresponding to the AT state ST5. In step S207, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors provided for the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In step S208, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal. Here, the slot machine 10 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting tampering with the hopper device 53 . As already explained, the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of game media is established on the main line ML. The hopper device 53 is provided with a payout device for paying out the medals stored in the storage tank toward the medal discharge port 58, and a payout detection sensor for detecting the medals paid out from the payout device. . When it is necessary to pay out the medals, the payout device is drive-controlled to pay out the medals, and the paid-out medals are detected by the payout detection sensor. When the number of medals detected by the payout detection sensor reaches the number of medals to be paid out, the payout of medals from the payout device is stopped. In this case, an illegal jig is inserted from the front of the slot machine 10 through the medal discharge port 58, and the payout detection sensor cannot detect medals by the illegal jig. A fraudulent act to pay out more medals than medals is assumed. In the slot machine 10, if the payout detection sensor does not detect medals for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) even though the payout device is driven and controlled to pay out medals, the payout device is driven as a payout abnormality. Although the control will be stopped, if the fraudulent act as described above is performed, a large number of medals will be paid out during the predetermined period. In addition, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification is executed, but the abnormality notification is canceled by performing an abnormality canceling operation on the key cylinder 14 after the medals are replenished.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting an object moving toward the payout detection sensor from the medal discharge port 58 in order to prevent fraudulent activity as described above. A plurality of the object detection sensors are provided along the route from the medal discharge port 58 to the payout detection sensor. In the sensor monitoring process of step S208, when each object detection sensor becomes a detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side → the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side within the abnormality detection period (for example, 5 seconds). However, if each object detection sensor becomes a detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side → the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side within the abnormality detection period, an intrusion abnormality will occur. I judge. When it is determined that there is an intrusion abnormality, the intrusion abnormality flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and an intrusion abnormality command corresponding to the intrusion abnormality is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. - 特許庁As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. The intrusion abnormality notification is temporarily stopped by stopping the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10, but if the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" after the supply of operating power is restarted, Since the transmission of the intrusion abnormality command to the production side MPU 92 is performed again, the intrusion abnormality notification is resumed. In order to cancel the state in which the intrusion abnormality flag is set to "1", it is necessary to execute a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

In step S209, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S210, a counter process for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S211, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the MPU 92 on the production side is performed. In step S212, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S213, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72, respectively.

In step S214, a management process is executed to manage the game history and display the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display section 66. FIG. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2, which will be described later, to the total number of games is calculated, and the ratio of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. In this case, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2 to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the set value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the information of the ratio performed for each set value. Thereafter, in step S215, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, start waiting processing is executed (step S302). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether or not a replay bet set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S401). The replay bet set flag specifies whether or not the bet setting for the same number of bets as the previous bet number has already been completed when any of the replay winnings have been established in the previous game. is a flag for If a negative determination is made in step S401, on condition that any replay winning has been established in the previous game (step S402: YES), the bet number setting counter 74a provided in the main side RAM 74 (see FIG. 9 ), the value of the bet number history counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is set (step S403). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the bet number of the game to be executed by the main MPU 72, and the bet number history counter is for specifying the bet number of the previous game by the main MPU 72. is a counter of After that, the bet set flag for replay is set to "1" (step S404).

When a positive determination is made in step S401, when a negative determination is made in step S402, or when the process of step S404 is executed, a bet handling process is executed (step S405). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing bet handling processing.

If the current gaming state is not the second CB state ST3 (step S501: NO), "3" is set as the upper limit number of bets, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be betted in the current game (step S502). If the current gaming state is the second CB state ST3 (step S501: YES), the upper limit number of bets, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be betted in the current game, is set to "2" (step S503). That is, in the present slot machine 10, the upper limit bet number is set to "2" when in the second CB state ST3, and the upper limit bet number is set to "3" when not in the second CB state ST3.

When the process of step S502 or step S503 is executed, on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is not the current bet upper limit number (step S504: NO), the stored virtual medals are It is determined whether or not an effective betting operation has been performed with one or more cards (step S505). The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored. In step S505, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, thereby determining whether or not there are one or more virtual medals stored. Further, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, it is determined that a valid betting operation has been performed, and when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is increased. It is determined that a valid bet operation has been made on condition that the number is 1 or less.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S505, a bet setting process is executed (step S506). In the bet setting process, when the first credit input button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is changed. In addition to setting the bet upper limit number, the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the bet upper limit number. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a. In addition, in the bet amount setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a is is set to "2", the value for the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2 If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a.

If affirmative determination is made in step S504, if a negative determination is made in step S505, or if the process of step S506 is executed, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a detects that medals have been inserted into the medal slot 45. It is determined whether or not one medal has been detected (step S507). When an affirmative determination is made in step S507, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is less than the bet upper limit number (step S508: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1 (step S509). ), if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the upper limit bet number (step S508: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S510). When the process of step S509 or step S510 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is greater than or equal to the upper limit bet number and the value of the credit counter 74b is greater than or equal to the upper limit stored memory number (specifically, "50"). (step S511: YES), the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S512). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

If a negative determination is made in step S507, if a negative determination is made in step S511, or if the process of step S512 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 (step S513 ). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 (step S513: YES), provided that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" (step S514: YES), "1" is set in the bet set flag at the time of acceptance (step S515). On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the first CB state ST2 (step S513: NO), on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 2 or more (step S516: YES), the bet setting at the time of acceptance has been completed. The flag is set to "1" (step S515).

The bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the number of game media capable of starting one game has been betted. When the gaming state is the first CB state ST2, a single game cannot be started in a state where "3" game media are not betted. It is possible to start one game. Further, when the gaming state is not the first CB state ST2, one game cannot be started in a situation where two or more game media are not betted, and two or more game media are betted. It is possible to start one game.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process (FIG. 13), after executing the bet handling process in step S405, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406). If the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406: YES), after executing settlement processing (step S407), the bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S408). In the settlement process of step S407, if the bet set flag at the time of replay in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", the number of bets corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the medals are discharged to the medal receiving tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, when the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the hopper device 53 is operated so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59. Drive control. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 12), after executing the start waiting processing in step S302, either the replay bet set flag or the acceptance bet set flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". is set (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S302.

If the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304: YES), after the main line ML is activated, reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, in step S306, setting processing at the time of starting for performing various settings when the game is started is executed, and in step S307, lottery processing for the winning combination in the current game is executed. At step S308, reel control processing is executed to drive and control the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery processing for the current combination.

After that, medium application processing is executed (step S309). In the medium awarding process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with a number of game media corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when virtual medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the current minor winning combination is added to the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage memory number. drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage memory number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59 . In addition, in the medium provision process, display control is performed on the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display section 66 is continued until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Also, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed (step S311). Thereafter, acceptance permission processing is executed (step S312). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Next, the setting process at the time of start executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, both the replay bet set flag and the accept bet set flag in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0" (step S601). After that, when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3" (step S602: NO), the first bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S603), When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2" (step S602: YES), a second bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S604). The first bet number command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the bet number of the game started this time is "3", and the second bet number command is a command that the bet number of the game started this time is " 2” is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that it is.

When the process of step S603 or step S604 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is set to the bet number history counter of the main RAM 74 (step S605). Note that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

Next, the winning lottery process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a first random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. The present slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the first random number at that time is latched from the first random number circuit 75 . The first random number circuit 75 generates a first random number from "0" to "65535". It stores in RAM74. With such a configuration, the first random number can be acquired quickly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and problems such as synchronization can be avoided. The first random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the first random number, the lottery table for judging the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S702). In this slot machine 10, six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance. It is possible to set whether the lottery process for the winning combination is to be executed based on the winning probability corresponding to which set value. A set value of "n+1" is more advantageous to the player than "n" in winning probability. Specifically, the set value of "n+1" is more advantageous for the player than the set value of "n" because the winning probability of the predetermined combination is higher than the set value of "n". . Also, even if the set value is the same level, the number of betted game media of "3" is more advantageous for the player than the number of bets of "2". In addition, there are a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3 as game states. In step S702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value, the current bet number, and the current gaming state is selected.

The lottery table in the non-CB state will be described using the case where the set value is "3" as an example. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination lottery table when betting 3 cards, which is selected when the number of bets is "3", and FIG. 18 is selected when the number of bets is "2". FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when two cards are bet; In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 19 will be referred to as appropriate.

The index value IV is set in the combination lottery table as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 regardless of whether 3 coins are bet or 2 coins are bet. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (that is, a winning combination), and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value of the first random number circuit 75 (“65535”). In addition, the number of index value IVs is the same when betting 3 cards and when betting 2 cards. It is the same at time and at the time of betting two cards.

Specifically, the index values IV=1 to 6 are set with the first bell winning data and any one of the first to sixth compensation winning data are set. If the winning is made with the index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. When the reel 32M is the middle reel 32M and the reel 32R is the third stop (reel where the last stop command is issued), the first bell win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Otherwise, the first compensation winning prize can be established. When winning with index value IV=2, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the fourth compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=3, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the third complementary winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=4, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the sixth compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=5, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the second compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=6, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the fifth compensation winning can be established.

In the present slot machine 10, as already explained, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that up to four symbols can be slid. done. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for establishing a prize. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML (this phenomenon is also known as "dropout"). Say). The 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning and various replay winnings are a winning mode in which no loss occurs when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. The watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the first CB prize, and the second CB prize are prize modes in which failure can occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The index values IV=7 to 9 are set with the second bell winning data and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data. When winning with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. The second bell winning prize is established without fail regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the seventh compensation winning prize can be established. When winning with the index value IV=8, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop and the third stop and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 Regardless of the timing, the 2nd bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the 9th compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=9, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop and the third stop and the operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 Regardless of the timing, the 2nd bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the 8th compensation winning can be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the index value IV=10 is set with the first bell winning data. When winning with the index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 19, the winning of the first bell is established without fail regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. .

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=11. If a win is made with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be established. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=12. If a win is made with the index value IV=12, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only cherry-winning data is set for the index value IV=13. If a win is made with the index value IV=13, as shown in FIG. 19, a cherry win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=14. When winning with index value IV=14, as shown in FIG. 19, 1st chance replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=15. When winning with index value IV=15, as shown in FIG. 19, 2nd chance replay winning is established without fail regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=16. When winning with index value IV=16, as shown in FIG. 19, normal replay winning is established without regard to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

For the index value IV=17, only the first CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. Only the second CB winning data is set as shown. In other words, the first CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". can be established. The second CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". can be established. When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "3", as shown in FIG. 19, the first CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the first CB winning will not be established. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "2", the second CB winning can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the second CB winning will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning has been established, and are deleted in the games following the winning game. is not carried over. On the other hand, the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data are cleared by the main side RAM 74 (the 1st CB winning data is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105), the 2nd CB winning data is stored until the corresponding prize is established, even in the games following the winning game, except when the all clearing process (step S105) is performed. In this case, in a game in which one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery.

In other words, as a result of playing the game in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the first CB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning has not been established. In this state, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets "3" after that, and the number of bets is increased after that. Even if the game is played under the condition of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. In addition, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the second CB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning has not been established. In this state, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets "3" after that, and the number of bets is increased after that. Even if the game is played under the condition of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. Thus, to prevent either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data from being newly stored although either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is already stored. is possible, and it is possible to prevent a plurality of CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

17 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=3 , the probability of winning when the index value IV=4, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 are each about 1/ 21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7, the probability of winning when the index value IV=8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 are approximately 1/21.8. be. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/9.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13 is about 1/423. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=14 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=15 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=16 is about 1/7.3. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/3.3.

On the other hand, when the combination lottery table for betting 2 cards in FIG. 18 is selected, the probability of winning for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is higher than when the combination lottery table for betting 3 cards is selected. low probability. Specifically, when the combination lottery table is selected for a two-coin bet, the probability of winning for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is the probability when the combination lottery table is selected for a three-coin bet. is less than 2/3 of the probability. As a result, the game executed with the game medium "3" bet is accompanied by the awarding of the game medium more than the game executed with the game medium "2" bet. It is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a replay prize in which a minor winning prize and a replay are awarded.

However, when the combination lottery table for betting two cards is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/2.2. On the other hand, when the combination lottery table for betting 3 cards is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/3.3. As a result, the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game executed in the state where "2" game media is betted is executed in the state where "3" game media are betted. It is possible to increase the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game played.

In addition to the combination lottery table for 3-coin bet and the combination lottery table for 2-coin bet, the main-side ROM 73 stores the lottery process for the combination in each of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (FIG. 16). ) is stored in the CB lottery table. Only one index value IV is set in the lottery table for CB, and normal replay winning data is set in the one index value IV. The probability of winning with the index value IV is 3/10, and when winning with the index value IV, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing. Regardless of the order, regular replay prizes are established. When the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing even though the index value IV is won, or if the index value IV is not won, the first bell win can be established.

Here, the index values IV other than the index values IV=12 and 15 have the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6". This applies both when the number of game media bet is "3" and when it is "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities of index values IV=12 and 15 are different between set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability of winning with the index value IV=12 is lowest when the setting value is "1", the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning is, and the higher the setting value is, the highest when the setting value is "6". high. Also, the probability of winning with the index value IV=15 is lowest for the set value of "1", the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning, and the higher the set value is, the highest for the set value of "6". As a result, it is possible to provide different advantages among the set values of "1" to "6".

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), after selecting the lottery table in step S702, after setting the index value IV to "1" (step S703), the judgment value used when judging whether the winning combination is right or wrong. DV is set (step S704). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. Note that in the first judgment value setting process, the value of the first random number obtained in step S701 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the value of the first random number corresponds to the index value IV=1, which is the current index value IV. A new determination value DV is obtained by adding the point value PV to be determined.

After that, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined (step S705). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds "65535" (step S705: YES), winning data acquisition processing for setting winning data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S706).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S705: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S707), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S704 to continue determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S704, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S705, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S706 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S708, it means that the determination of whether the winning combination is correct has ended. In this case, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S709). After that, in step S710, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, in step S711, the first control process of the game section is executed, and in step S712, a stop order notification control process is executed. Details of the processing in steps S710 to S712 will be described later.

After that, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S713). In the transmission process, if any winning combination is won in the current lottery process (FIG. 16), information corresponding to the winning combination and information corresponding to the current game state. , and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S710 and S711 are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. .

When receiving the game start command, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps various information about the current game from the game start command. Then, the effect-side MPU 92 determines the content of the effect in a manner corresponding to the grasped various information. Then, the data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Execute control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not the current game is the start game (that is, the first game) of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is a game state advantageous to the player (step S801). If a negative determination is made in step S801, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S802). In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game. waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main side RAM 74 . By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S207 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42-44. Players and the like are notified of this.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S801, reel effect processing is executed (step S803). Although the details of the reel effect processing will be described later, effects using the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are executed when the conditions for executing the reel effect are satisfied. In the reel effect processing, when the reel effect is generated, the rotation start processing similar to step S802 is executed after the reel effect ends. Further, in the reel effect processing, when the condition for executing the reel effect is not satisfied, the rotation start processing similar to that of step S802 is executed without generating the reel effect.

If the process of step S802 or step S803 has been executed, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S804). If none of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated, the process of step S804 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. When it is determined that any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. (step S805). If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S804, and the process of step S804 is repeatedly executed until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S806). The stop instruction command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is transmitted, stop control processing shown in steps S807 to S813 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S807). Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S808).

In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. Therefore, in step S808, any value from "0" to "4" is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM74.

After that, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position (step S809). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol numbers of the stop symbols are equal (step S810), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of is performed (step S811). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S812). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed (step S813), and the process returns to step S804.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). , it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") with respect to the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, sliding number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the sliding number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As the processing for setting the stop information, the first stop information setting processing executed in step S709 of the winning lottery processing (FIG. 16) and the step S813 of the reel control processing (FIG. 20) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process for the combination. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. .

When it is determined in step S812 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, a prize determination process is executed in step S814. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has been won and the winning handling process is executed. In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed for executing the replay setting process in the next start waiting process (FIG. 13).

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S815). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and, if the winning has been established, data indicating the type of the winning.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 21, the processing for dealing with the end of the game, which is executed in step S310 of the normal processing (FIG. 12), will be described. Since the process of step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S308), the process to deal with the end of the game is to stop the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. will be executed after

First, in the first CB state ST2, CB processing is executed to perform transition control and progress control of the second CB state ST3 (step S901). The CB processing will be described later in detail. Thereafter, on the condition that the game is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S902: NO), the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current gaming state (step S903). Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1, normal processing is executed (step S904), and when the gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus processing is executed (step S905). ), when the game state is the AT state ST5, AT processing is executed (step S906), and when the game state is the end preparation state ST6, the second control processing of the game section is executed (step S907). . Further, the second control process (step S907) of the game section is also executed when any one of the normal process of step S904, the pseudo-bonus process of step S905 and the AT process of step S906 is executed. In addition, the second control process (step S907) of the game section is executed also when it is in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. Details of the processing in steps S904 to S907 will be described later.

When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, by making an affirmative determination in step S902, normal processing in step S904, pseudo-bonus processing in step S905, and AT processing in step S906 Take no action. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing for advancing the normal game state ST1, the processing for advancing the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the processing for advancing the AT state ST5 are executed. not. On the other hand, even if the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second control process for the game section in step S907 is executed. Therefore, even in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for advancing the second section SC2 is executed.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and game section will be described. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining game states and game intervals that exist in the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as game states, there are a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a pseudo-bonus state ST4, an AT state ST5, and an end preparation state ST6. These game states ST1 to ST6 do not overlap each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the main side RAM 74 is stayed by executing partial clear processing (step S104) or full clear processing (step S105). Further, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 generated in the normal game state ST1 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1 when the end preparation state ST6 ends. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2".

The normal game state ST1 is the expected net increase in game media in one game ("Expected number of game media to be given in one game" to "Game media bet in one game number of media”) is less than one. Further, in the normal game state ST1, there is a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74 .

The first CB state ST2 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the first CB winning is established while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . In the first CB state ST2, one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "3", while one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "2". can't Also, the second CB state ST3 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the second CB winning is established in a situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM74. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be executed when the bet number of game media is "2", while the upper limit bet number is set to "2", so "3" game media are bet. Can not do it.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the relevant game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the relevant game state. It is a game state in which the number of is reduced. Details of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described later.

The pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a game state that is shifted to when conditions for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are established in the normal game state ST1. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met. When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without fulfilling the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and the condition for shifting to the AT state ST5 does not fulfill, the state shifts to the end preparation state ST6. Further, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The pseudo bonus state ST4 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. There is a stored internal state.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. Further, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any one of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is notified. A game medium of “15” is awarded when the first bell win or the second bell win is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if 3 coins are bet, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game is 1 or more, and if 2 coins are bet in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the amount of game media in 1 game. Net increase expected value is less than 1.

The AT state ST5 is a game state that is shifted to when conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 are established in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. When the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and when the second section SC2 ends when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game shifts to the end preparation state ST6. When the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and when the second section SC2 does not end when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the state does not shift to the end preparation state ST6. It shifts to the normal game state ST1. In addition, when the AT state ST5 is terminated by the satisfaction of the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the normal game state ST1 is entered.

In the AT state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The AT state ST5 is a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There exists an internal state where

In the AT state ST5, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. Also, in the AT state ST5, when any one of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is notified. A game medium of “15” is awarded when the first bell prize or the second bell prize is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the AT state ST5. In the AT state ST5, if 3 coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in one game is 1 or more, and in the AT state ST5, if 2 coins are bet, the expected net increase in game media in 1 game. value is less than 1.

The end preparation state ST6 is a game state that is shifted to when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without the conditions for the ending of the second section SC2 (to be described later) being satisfied and the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 being satisfied. In addition, the end preparation state ST6 is a case where the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, being satisfied, and the second section SC2 ends when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 occurs. It is a game state that shifts to the case.

The end preparation state ST6 ends when one game is executed. When the ready-to-end state ST6 ends, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the end preparation state ST6, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST6 is a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet. In addition, the termination preparation state ST6 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored on the main side. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74 .

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, game sections are set separately from these game states ST1 to ST6. A first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in the slot machine 10, the number of game media bets of "2" and "3", set values of "1" to "6", various game states ST1 to ST6, and There are game sections of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 includes the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Due to the notification of the stop order, the net increase expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media given in one game") is 1 or more. This is a section in which an advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4 and AT state ST5) that can be obtained does not start, and the above-mentioned advantageous game state does not continue. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the complete clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the game state is normal game state ST1 and becomes the first section SC1. Further, when the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 is also set. The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the complete clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed as described above, the first section SC1 is executed, and the second section SC2 is initialized. also becomes the first section SC1. On the other hand, the second section SC2 is shifted from the first section SC1 by generating an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 based on the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1. In this case, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur, while the bet number of the first section SC1 is "2". Even if a certain game is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2. Therefore, a player who expects to shift from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 needs to play a game with a bet number of "3" instead of a game with a bet number of "2". There is

In the first section SC1, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game is certainly less than 1, whereas in the second section SC2, only when the net increase expected value of the game media in one game is less than 1 It may be 1 or more. Therefore, the second section SC2 is more advantageous than the first section SC1. Therefore, the player expects the first section SC1 to shift to the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 ends when an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 occurs, and shifts to the second section SC2. On the other hand, the second section SC2 can end when the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5 or the end preparation state ST6 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1. When the second section SC2 ends, the process proceeds to the first section SC1. In addition, as a condition for ending the second section SC2, the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2 without transition to the first section SC1 is the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). ) and the continuation of the second section SC2 without transition to the first section SC1, the total number of restricted net additions of game media reaches the upper limit net addition number (specifically, 2400). An ending condition is set that either one of the conditions for reaching is satisfied. The restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0 when no game media are awarded"). ")" minus the "total number of game media consumed to execute the game while the second section SC2 is being continued ("0" when the game is not being executed)" In the case of the difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is the increase of the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

In other words, when the second section SC2 is continued and the total number of net increases with restrictions on the number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number, the second section SC2 ends and the second section SC2 ends. It shifts to 1 section SC1. Further, when the number of games executed since the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games by continuing the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 starts. Transition. When either one of these ending conditions is met, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5 is terminated in the game in which the ending condition is met even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5. At the same time, the second section SC2 ends and the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the player can stay in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, the pseudo bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, and the end preparation state ST6 do not stay in the first section SC1, but stay only in the second section SC2.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state ST1 to ST6 in the second section SC2. As already explained, in the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, and the end preparation state ST6, the game can be executed in any of the situations where the bet number of game media is "3" and "2". is possible. In the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when the number of game media bet is "3", and in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed only when the number of game media bet is "2". It is possible to run

In the case of the normal gaming state ST1 in the second section SC2, whether the game with the bet number of "3" or the game with the bet number of "2" is executed. The net increase expected value of game media is less than one. In this case, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, a lottery process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can be executed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in each game. , the shift lottery process is executed in the game in which the number of bets is "3", but is not executed in the game in which the number of bets is "2". Further, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, the value of the canceled game number counter 74e provided in the main side RAM 74 is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed, and after the decrement of 1, When the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e is "0", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed. is executed, but is not executed in games where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second interval SC2, a game with a bet number of "3" is better to be executed than a game with a bet number of "2". It is advantageous for the player.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, the net increase expected value of game media can be 1 or more, whereas a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. If executed, the expected net increase in game media is less than one. Therefore, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a game with a bet number of "3" is better for the player than a game with a bet number of "2". Advantageous. In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, as will be described later, lottery processing for shifting to the AT state ST5 can be executed based on the result of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in each game. It is executed in games where the number of bets is "3", but is not executed in games where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, from this point of view as well, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, it is better to execute a game with a bet number of "3" than to execute a game with a bet number of "2". It is advantageous for those who

In the AT state ST5, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, the net increase expected value of game media can be 1 or more, whereas a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. If so, the net increase expected value of game media is less than one. Therefore, in the AT state ST5, playing a game with a bet number of "3" is more advantageous to the player than playing a game with a bet number of "2". is. In the AT state ST5, as will be described later, an additional lottery for determining whether or not to increase the number of remaining games to be continued in the AT state ST5 is performed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in each game. process, and a transition lottery process to an additional period in which the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is likely to increase. is executed, but is not executed in games where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, from this point of view as well, in the AT state ST5, a game with a bet number of "3" is better to be executed than a game with a bet number of "2". is advantageous for

As described above, in the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, even if it is advantageous to execute the game with the number of bets "3". , the number of game media awarded in a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is equal to the number of game media in the second section SC2. In addition to being added as a limited total net increase number, the game in which the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is continued in the second section SC2. is added as the total number of games played. In other words, a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player. It ends up contributing to the side that satisfies the ending condition of section SC2. From this point of view as well, in the case of any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, it is better to execute a game with a bet number of "3". It is more advantageous to the player than having the game with the number "2" run.

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB winning can be established and the second CB winning can be established in the same manner as in the first section SC1. When the first CB win is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 enters the first CB state ST2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even after the first CB state ST2 and after the first CB state ST2 ends. be. In addition, when the second CB winning is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 becomes the second CB state ST3, and the second section SC2 continues even after the second CB state ST3 and when the second CB state ST3 ends. maintained. In both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, as already explained, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. This is a game state in which the number of media is reduced. That is, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the games executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, although the games executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous to the player, the games contribute to fulfilling the ending condition of the second section SC2. . Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it is more disadvantageous for the player.

It should be noted that in the end preparation state ST6, the number of game media is reduced regardless of whether a game with a bet number of "3" is executed or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the second section SC2. Although the net increase expected value is less than 1, this is a gaming state in which only one game is executed while the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5. Therefore, the games executed in the ready-to-end state ST6 do not contribute to the restricted total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and furthermore do not contribute to the total number of games in the second section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even a game executed in the ready-to-end state ST6 contributes to the restricted total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and furthermore, in the second section SC2 It may be configured to contribute to the total number of games.

<Regarding CB states ST2 and ST3>
Next, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are described in detail. FIG. 24(a) shows the first CB winning combination (that is, the index value IV at which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74) and the second CB winning combination (that is, the second CB winning data that is stored in the main RAM 74). FIG. 24B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index value IV), and FIG. 24B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the first CB combination can be won in games where the number of bets is "3", but cannot be won in games where the number of bets is "2". In a game where the number of bets is "3", the first CB combination is won with a probability of about 1/3.3. However, the winning state of the first CB role (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB role (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery targets in the lottery process (FIG. 16).

The second CB combination can be won in games where the number of bets is "2", but cannot be won in games where the number of bets is "3". In a game where the number of bets is "2", the second CB role is won with a probability of about 1/2.2. However, the winning state of the first CB role (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB role (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second CB combination is excluded from the lottery targets in the lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the winning state of the 1st CB combination, the 1st CB winning can be realized in the game with the bet number of "3", while the 1st CB winning can not be established in the game with the bet number of "2". Therefore, when a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the 1st CB combination, even if the combination lottery process (FIG. 16) results in no winning of any index value IV. , regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first CB prize is not established. Further, when a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination, even if the winning index value IV that can cause a so-called dropout occurs in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), reel Regardless of the order of stopping 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, the first CB prize is not established. When the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB prize is established, the state becomes the first CB state ST2.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), in the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute a game in which the number of bets is "3". Impossible. In the first CB state ST2, normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, a normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the left stop button 42 is pressed. When the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not the predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the winning of the first bell is achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

However, it is not limited to this, and when normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the normal replay prize is established reliably regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, in the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stopping of the stop buttons 42 to 44 A configuration may be adopted in which the winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the operation timing.

When the first bell win is established in the first CB state ST2, the game medium of "1" is provided. As already explained, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when "3" game media are betted. On the other hand, the number of game media awarded in the game in the first CB state ST2 is "1". Then, the first CB state ST2 ends when "30" game media are provided. Therefore, in the first CB state ST2, it is necessary to generate 30 times the event that "1" game media is awarded in the game executed by betting "3" game media. The game media possessed by the player will decrease by at least 60 from the start of the first CB state ST2 to the end of the first CB state ST2. Therefore, the first CB state ST2 is a game state disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the first CB state ST2, as described above, the normal replay winning may be established, and both the normal replay winning and the first bell winning may not be established. Then, when the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 games or more, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. will be added to the total number of games played.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning can be established in the game with the bet number of "2", while the second CB winning is not established in the game with the bet number of "3". Therefore, when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if the lottery process of the combination (FIG. 16) results in no winning of any index value IV. , the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44 do not establish the second CB winning. Further, when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if the winning index value IV that can cause a so-called dropout occurs in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), reel The second CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. When a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination and the second CB winning is established, the state becomes the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed in a situation where the number of bets is "2", and the maximum bet number of game media is "2". In the second CB state ST3, normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, a normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the second CB state ST3, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 but the left stop button 42 is pressed. When the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not the predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the winning of the first bell is achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

However, it is not limited to this, and when normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the second CB state ST3, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the normal replay prize is established reliably regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, in the second CB state ST3, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop of the stop buttons 42 to 44 A configuration may be adopted in which the winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the operation timing.

If the first bell win is established in the second CB state ST3, the game medium of "1" is provided. As already explained, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed only when "2" game media are betted. On the other hand, the number of game media awarded in the game in the second CB state ST3 is "1". Then, the second CB state ST3 ends when "30" game media are awarded. Therefore, in the second CB state ST3, it is necessary to generate 30 times the event that "1" game media is awarded in the game executed by betting "2" game media. The game media possessed by the player will decrease by at least 30 from the start of the second CB state ST3 to the end of the second CB state ST3. Therefore, the second CB state ST3 becomes a game state disadvantageous to the player. However, this disadvantage of the second CB state ST3 is lower than that of the first CB state ST2.

Further, in the second CB state ST3, as described above, the normal replay winning may be established, and both the normal replay winning and the first bell winning may not be established. Then, when the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 games or more, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. added to the total number of games played.

As described above, in the configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as game states that are disadvantageous to the player, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2", the winning state of the second CB combination is obtained. At the same time, after preventing the second CB winning from being established, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, and as a result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Regardless of the order and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. That is, when the second CB role is won by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2", a game in which the number of bets is "3" is subsequently executed to achieve the second CB role. Even in the winning state of , the second CB prize is not established. Also, in the winning state of the second CB role, even if a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed, the first CB role is excluded from the lottery in the role lottery process (FIG. 16). will not be elected. Since the winning state of the first CB combination is not established, the first CB prize is not established, and the game state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. As a result, it is possible to execute a game with a bet number of "3" while preventing transitions to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. Then, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "3", a transition to the second section SC2 can occur as already described, and a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can occur.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is assumed that the main side RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105) for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, in a situation where medals are to be paid out, an illegal jig is used for the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 to prevent medals from being detected, thereby paying out more medals than should be paid out. It is assumed that there will be fraudulent acts that On the other hand, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the entry of the illegal jig, and the object detection sensor detects the entry of the illegal jig. Intrusion anomaly notification is executed when Therefore, even if the fraudulent jig is inserted in such a way that it is not detected by the object detection sensor, the fraudulent jig is repeatedly used to fraudulently pay out a large number of medals. Intrusion of an illegal jig may be detected by an object detection sensor, and intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudulent person forcibly ends the intrusion abnormality notification by illegally executing the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 . Then, it is assumed that a game will be played using the illegally obtained medals in the slot machine 10 in which the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, if such a fraudulent act is performed, the main side RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105), so that the main side RAM 74 does not store the second CB winning data. In other words, it is not in the winning state of the second CB combination. When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in a state in which the second CB role is not won, the first CB role can be won, and if the first CB award is established, the player will be disadvantaged. It becomes the first CB state ST2, which is a game state. As a result, it becomes possible to give a disadvantage to the person who has committed the above fraudulent act. On the other hand, in the gaming hall, by executing a game with the number of bets of "2" before the opening of business, etc., so that the second CB role is won, normal players who do not commit the above fraudulent acts can On the other hand, it is possible to play a game with a bet number of "3" while preventing the occurrence of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the probability of winning the second CB role in a game where the number of bets is "2" is about 1/2.2, whereas in a game where the number of bets is "3" The probability of winning the first CB role is about 1/3.3. That is, the probability of winning the second CB combination is set higher than the probability of winning the first CB combination. As a result, when the second CB role is won by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a game hall or the like, the number of games required until the second CB role is won is reduced. becomes possible. On the other hand, even if a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed before the 2nd CB role is erroneously won, the probability of winning the 1st CB role is higher than the probability of winning the 2nd CB role. By making it low, it is possible to make it difficult to win the first CB combination.

The probability of winning the 2nd CB role is not limited to a configuration higher than the probability of winning the 1st CB role, and the probability of winning the 1st CB role is higher than the probability of winning the 2nd CB role. A high configuration may be employed, and a configuration may be employed in which the probability of winning the first CB role and the probability of winning the second CB role are the same or substantially the same.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing the CB processing executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. Incidentally, the CB process is executed at step S901 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As already explained, the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21) is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the CB processing is also performed in one game by the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. is executed after all rotations of are stopped.

By determining whether or not "1" is set to either the first CB state flag or the second CB state flag provided in the main side RAM 74, the current gaming state is changed to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. (step S1001). The first CB state flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game state is the first CB state ST2 in the main side MPU 72, and the second CB state flag mainly indicates whether or not the game state is the second CB state ST3. This is a flag for identification by the side MPU 72 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning has been established in this game (step S1002). That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the first CB winning has stopped on the main line ML while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . If the first CB winning has been established (step S1002: YES), the first CB status flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1003), and the first CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1004). ). Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1005). As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, the processing of steps S513 to S515 in the bet handling processing (FIG. 14) is executed as already described, so that the game is executed only in the situation where "3" game media are betted. The Rukoto.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the second CB winning has been established in this game (step S1006). That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the second CB winning has stopped on the main line ML while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . If the second CB winning has been established (step S1006: YES), the second CB status flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007), and the second CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1008). ). Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the second CB state ST3 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1009). As a result, the gaming state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, the processing of steps S503, S508, S515, and S516 in the bet handling processing (FIG. 14) is executed as already described, so that the game media "2" are betted. The game will be executed only at

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first bell winning has been established in the current game (step S1010). When the first bell winning has been established (step S1010: YES), 1 is added to the value of the total grant counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S1011). The total given counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game media given in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 by the main side MPU 72, and the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started. Cleared to "0" when

When the value of the total grant counter after adding 1 becomes "30" which is the end reference number of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (step S1012: YES), the CBs corresponding to the current CB states ST2 and ST3 The status flag is cleared to "0" (step S1013). Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1014).

Next, how the game state shifts to the CB states ST2 and ST3 and how the shift to the CB states ST2 and ST3 is restricted will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 26(a) shows a period in which the game is played with "3" game media being bet, and FIG. 26(b) shows a period in which the game is played with "2" game media being bet. 26(c) shows the period during which the 1st CB combination is won, FIG. 26(d) shows the period during which the 2nd CB combination is won, and FIG. 26(e) shows the period. Shows the period during which the first CB prize or the second CB prize can be established, FIG. 26(f) shows the period in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and FIG. 26(g) shows the first section FIG. 26(h) shows a period during which the game can be completed in the second section SC2, in SC1.

First, the case where transitions to the CB states ST2 and ST3 are restricted will be described.

At timing t1, which is the timing after the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105), a game with a bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 26(b). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, and the game section is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. Then, the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeatedly executed, so that the second CB combination is won at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 26(d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. In addition, in the state where the second CB combination is won, as shown in FIG. It is a period during which it is possible to establish

After that, at the timing t3, the game in which the number of bets is "3" is repeatedly executed as shown in FIG. 26(a). Even if the 2nd CB role is won, the 2nd CB win will not be established if the game with the number of bets "3" is executed, and the 1st CB role will be won if the 2nd CB role is won. never do. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 26(e), it becomes a period in which the establishment of the CB winning is not allowed. Further, when the game with the bet number of "2" is executed, the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 does not occur, but when the game with the bet number of "3" is executed, the second section is not generated. Since an opportunity to shift to SC2 may occur, it is possible to shift to the second section SC2 at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 26(g).

After that, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t4, so that the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. , the game is completed in the second section SC2.

After that, at the timing of t5, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 26(b). In this case, since the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, the situation is such that the second CB winning can be established as shown in FIG. 26(e). Also, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h). After that, when the second CB winning is established at the timing of t6, the state becomes the second CB state ST3 as shown in FIG. 26(f). Even if the game in the second CB state ST3 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h).

Next, a case where the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated from the timing after the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

At timing t7, which is the timing after the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, a game with a bet number of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 26(a). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, and the game section is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. When a game in which the bet number is "3" is executed, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur. It is a transition period. After that, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t8, so that the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. , the game is completed in the second section SC2.

After that, the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeatedly executed, so that the first CB combination is won at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 26(c). Also, in a state where the first CB combination is won, a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. This is the period during which the prize can be established. After that, when the first CB winning is established at the timing of t10, the state becomes the first CB state ST2 as shown in FIG. 26(f). Even if the game in the first CB state ST2 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h).

After that, at the timing of t11, the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 26(f). Even after the first CB state ST2 ends, the second section SC2 continues as shown in FIG. If so, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 26(h).

Next, a case where the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated from the timing after the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

At timing t12, which is the timing after the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105), a game with a bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 26(b). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, and the game section is the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. Then, the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeatedly executed, so that the second CB combination is won at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 26(d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. Also, in a situation where the second CB combination is won, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed as shown in FIG. This is the period during which the prize can be established. Note that when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2, so as shown in FIG. not. After that, when the second CB win is established at the timing of t14, the second CB state ST3 is entered from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 26(f).

Next, the contents of various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet will be described.

As described above, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. By executing a game in which the number of bets is "3", it is possible to aim for the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. . In this case, the slot machine 10 is configured to notify that the first CB combination is not won and that the second CB combination is won.

FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the information related to the winning state of the first CB and second CB winning combinations executed by the image display device 63. FIG.

In a situation where the game can be executed and a situation in which the game is being executed, a moving image of the predetermined character image G11 is displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c). . In this case, when neither the first CB nor the second CB win is won, a non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 27(a). . The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in the corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the non-internal notification image G12 is maintained when the situation continues in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won.

As the non-internal notification image G12, a non-internal explicit image G21 indicating that neither the first CB nor the second CB win has been won, and neither the first CB or second CB win has been won. A non-internal game number image G22 indicating the number of games executed in the situation is displayed. A character image of "returning" is specifically displayed as the non-explicit internal image G21. This clearly indicates that neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won.

As the non-internally played game number image G22, specifically, a character image indicating the number of games executed in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB win has been won, such as "010 game", is displayed. . In this case, after the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the first game in the situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won is played. Until the game is completed, "000 games" is displayed as the non-internally played game number image G22. In addition, after the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is completed, until the first game is completed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won, the non-internally consumed game number image G22 is displayed. "000 games" is displayed. After that, the number of games displayed as the non-internally consumed game number image G22 each time one game is executed, regardless of whether the game has a bet number of "3" or the game has a bet number of "2". 1 is added.

Winning the second CB role in a game where the number of bets is "2" in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, and the state of winning the second CB role is achieved. As shown in b), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated. In this case, the display of the predetermined character image G11 is continued, but the image display device 63 does not display an image clearly indicating that the second CB combination has been won.

Winning the first CB role in a game where the number of bets is "3" in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, and the winning state of the first CB role is achieved. As shown in c), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated. In this case, the first internal clear image G13 that clearly indicates that the first CB win has been won is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63 . The first internal clear image G13 is displayed in the corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the first internal clear image G13 is maintained when the winning state of the first CB combination continues. Then, when the first CB winning is established and the game state shifts to the first CB state ST2, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 ends.

In the first CB state ST2, the image display device 63 displays the CB state. In addition, in the second CB state ST3, the image display device 63 also displays the CB state. Although the specific content of the display during the CB state is arbitrary, for example, the entire display surface of the image display device 63 may be dimly displayed while the predetermined character image G11 is being displayed on the image display device 63. . Also, an image showing the remaining number of payouts of game media required until the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends may be displayed.

In addition to the above notifications, various types of bet number related notifications are executed as notifications related to winning states of the first CB and second CB hands. Specifically, as the bet number-related notification, in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, reel By the timing when the stop operations of 32L, 32M, and 32R become valid, notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. The manner of execution of notification of the response to the winning of the second CB role is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "winning the second CB role" is output from the speaker 62 . The notification corresponding to winning of the 2nd CB role is also generated after the game in which the 2nd CB role is won, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB role.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, when a game in which the number of bets is “2” is executed, a notification corresponding to 2 bets is executed. The manner of execution of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as '2 bets are being paid' is output from the speaker 62 . The 2-bet notification indicates that the number of bets is "2" if the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated without intervening the game with the number of bets of "3" in the winning state of the second CB combination. does not occur after the second game of the game.

In a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the 3-bet correspondence notification is executed when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed. The mode of execution of the 3-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "3 bets are paid" is output from the speaker 62. FIG. In the case where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, the 3-bet notification is repeated without intervening a game with a bet number of "3" and a game with a bet number of "2". In this case, it does not occur in the second and subsequent games in which the number of bets is "3".

In a situation where neither the 1st CB hand nor the 2nd CB hand is won, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is valid if the 1st CB hand is won in a game where the number of bets is "3". By the timing of , the notification of the winning of the first CB combination is executed. The manner of execution of notification of the winning of the 1st CB role is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as ``Winning the 1st CB role'' is output from the speaker 62. FIG. However, the notice corresponding to the winning of the 1st CB role is generated only in the game in which the 1st CB role is won, and in the subsequent game in which the 1st CB role is won, the number of bets is "2" and the number of bets is "3". None of the games will run.

In the winning state of the first CB combination, when a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed, the notification corresponding to 2 bets is executed. The manner of execution of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as '2 bets are being paid' is output from the speaker 62 . The 2-bet notification indicates that the number of bets is "2" if the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated without intervening the game with the number of bets of "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination. does not occur after the second game of the game.

Next, the execution of various notifications in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 28(a) shows the execution period of the game with the bet number of "2", FIG. 28(b) shows the execution period of the game with the bet number of "3", and FIG. 28(c) shows the bet number. FIG. 28(d) shows the period during which the notification sound is output when the number of bets is "2", which occurs when the game with the number of bets of "2" is played. FIG. 28(e) shows a period during which the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, and FIG. (f) shows the period during which the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 28(g) shows the period during which the first CB win is won, and FIG. 28(i) shows the period during which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is executed, and FIG. 28(j) shows the state during the CB state on the image display device 63. Indicates the period during which the display is being performed.

When the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is started, the effect execution control is started by the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t1. In this case, since the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 has been executed, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the non-internal notification image G12 starts to be displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 28(e).

After that, at timing t2, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 28(b). In this case, since a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, the notification corresponding to 3 bets is supported as shown in FIG. 28(d). A notification sound is output. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets of "3" is being executed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won. becomes. Also, at the timing of t2, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 game" to "001 game".

At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed again under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "3" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "2", the 3-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, the 3-bet correspondence notification is repeatedly executed in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "3" under the condition that neither the first CB nor the second CB is won. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Also, at the timing of t3, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed again under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, the first CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 28(g). Therefore, at the timing t4, a notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the first CB combination is output as shown in FIG. 28(d). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won. Further, the notification corresponding to the winning of the first CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the first CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the first CB role has been won before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the game in which the first CB role has been won. . Also, at timing t4, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "002 game" to "003 game".

After that, the game in which the first CB winning combination is won at the timing t5 ends without the establishment of the first CB winning. In this case, at the timing t5, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. The display of the internal explicit image G13 is started. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 28(b), a game is executed in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination. Then, at timing t7, which is the timing at which the game ends, the first CB win is established as shown in FIGS. 28(g) and 28(i), thereby shifting to the first CB state ST2. In this case, at the timing t7, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. The display during the CB state is started.

After that, at the timing of t8, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first CB state ST2. In the game as well, the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 28(j). After that, the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated, so that the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 28(i) at the timing of t9. In this case, the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 ends at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 28(j). In addition, since neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, the non-internal notification image G12 starts to be displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 28(e) at time t9. be done. In this case, the display content of the non-internal game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is "000 games".

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. At the timing t10, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 game" to "001 game".

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 28(a), the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed again under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, the second CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 28(h). Therefore, at the timing of t11, a notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is output as shown in FIG. 28(c). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. Further, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the second CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the game in which the second CB role has been won. . Also, at the timing of t11, the display content of the non-internally completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, the game in which the second CB winning combination is won at the timing of t12 ends without establishing the second CB prize. In this case, at the timing of t12, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game is executed in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning notification of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, and the second CB combination is won. It is possible to make the player or the manager of the game hall recognize that the player is there. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Thereafter, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 28(a), the game with the number of bets of "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed again. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated execution of the 2-bet notification in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification regarding the winning of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28(b), at timing t15 and timing t16, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. Since it is originally assumed that a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed when the 2nd CB role is won, the 3-bet support notification and the 2nd CB role are supported for the game. No notification is performed.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 28(a), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning notification of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, and the second CB combination is won. It is possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that there is a game hall. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 28(a), the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed again. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated execution of the 2-bet notification in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification regarding the winning of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Next, a processing configuration for performing various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets of game media as described above will be described.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing internal notification control processing executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The internal notification control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short period (for example, a period of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

First, it is determined whether or not a supply start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1101). When the supply of operating power is started, the main MPU 72, if no abnormality has occurred in the storage state of the main RAM 74, outputs a power recovery command as a command at the start of supply in the main process (FIG. 10). Send either a full initialization command or a partial initialization command. As already explained, the power recovery command is the address before power-off without executing the partial clear processing (step S104) and the all clear processing (step S105) when no abnormality has occurred in the storage state of the main RAM 74. This is the command sent when returning to The all-initialization command is a command that is transmitted when the all-clearing process (step S105) is executed, as will be described later. The partial initialization command is a command that is transmitted when the partial clear processing (step S104) is executed, as will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, control processing at the start of supply is executed (step S1102). FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing control processing at the start of supply.

When the all clear processing (step S105) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the all initialization command is received (step S1201: YES), the non-internal notification image on the image display device 63 The display of G12 is started (step S1202). When the all clear processing (step S105) is executed, all areas of the main side RAM 74 are initialized as will be described in detail later. situation. Therefore, when the all-initialization command is received, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started. In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games".

When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the partial initialization command is received (step S1203: YES), the partial initialization command Based on the set information, it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is won (step S1204). When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the area in which the second CB winning data is to be stored in the main RAM 74 is not initialized, as will be described in detail later, and the area other than the area ( (including an area where the first CB winning data is stored) is initialized.

If the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the main side will continue to perform the partial clearing process (step S104) after the supply of operating power is resumed. The state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the RAM 74 is maintained. On the other hand, if the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of operating power is resumed. Also, the state in which the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 is maintained. Information indicating whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 is set in the partial initialization command, as will be described later. Therefore, in step S1204, it is determined whether information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is included in the partial initialization command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1205). In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "1" is set to the second CB inside flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1206). The 2nd CB internal medium flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the 2nd CB combination has been won.

If the power recovery command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is won based on the information set in the power recovery command (step S1208). As already explained, information indicating whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is set in the power recovery command. If the 2nd CB combination is won (step S1208: YES), the 2nd CB inside flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1209).

If the second CB combination is not won (step S1208: NO), it is determined whether or not the first CB combination is won based on the information set in the power recovery command (step S1210). If the first CB combination is not won (step S1210: NO), display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1211). In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". If the first CB combination is won (step S1210: YES), display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1212). After that, "1" is set to the first CB internal flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1213). The 1st CB internal medium flag is a flag for the effect side MPU 92 to specify that the 1st CB combination has been won.

Returning to the description of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29), if the winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the information set in the winning result command will be used in the current game. It is determined whether or not the 1CB role has been won and the 1CB prize has not been established (step S1104). The main side MPU 72 transmits a winning result command to the effect side MPU 92 in step S815, which is a process executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game in the reel control process (FIG. 20). The winning result command includes information corresponding to the type of winning data stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game, and whether or not a winning has been established in the current game. information, and if a prize has been won in the current game, information on the type of prize that has been established is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, "1" is set to the first CB internal flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S1105), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1106). , the display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1107).

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the second CB role is won in this game from the information set in the winning result command, and the second It is determined whether or not 2CB winning has been established (step S1108). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, "1" is set to the second CB internal flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S1109), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1110). .

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is further determined whether or not a first CB winning command or a second CB winning command has been received from the main MPU 72. Thus, it is determined whether or not the first CB prize or the second CB prize has been established in the current game (step S1111). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first CB winning command in step S1005 of the CB processing (FIG. 25) when the first CB winning is established, and when the second CB winning is established, the CB processing A second CB winning command is transmitted in step S1009 of (FIG. 25).

If one of the CB winnings has been established (step S1111: YES), the process of clearing the CB inside flag is executed (step S1112). In the CB internal flag clearing process, when the first CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", the first CB internal flag is cleared to "0", and the second CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared. If the middle flag is set to "1", the middle flag inside the second CB is cleared to "0". After that, end processing of various displays is executed (step S1113). In the termination process, if the non-internal notification image G12 is being displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated, and the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. If so, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is terminated. After that, the image display device 63 starts displaying during the CB state (step S1114).

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined whether or not a CB end command has been received from the main MPU 72. It is determined whether or not the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been set have ended (step S1115). As already described, the main MPU 72 transmits a CB end command in step S1014 of the CB process (FIG. 25) when the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been executed are ended.

When the CB states ST2 and ST3 to be executed have ended (step S1115: YES), the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 is ended (step S1116). Thereafter, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1117).

In the internal notification control process, when a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), both the first CB inside flag and the second CB inside flag of the effect side RAM 94 are set to "1". is not set (step S1119 and step S1120: NO), a non-internal medium notification process is executed (step S1121). Also, if a game start command has been received from the master side MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and if "1" is set in the first CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1119: YES). , the first CB inside notification processing is executed (step S1122). Also, if a game start command has been received from the master side MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and if "1" is set in the second CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1120: YES). , second CB internal medium notification processing is executed (step S1123).

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing the non-internal notification process executed in step S1121 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, 1 is added to the value of the returning counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1301). The during-returning counter is a counter for specifying the number of games executed after the image display device 63 started displaying the non-internal notification image G12, and is set in the during-returning counter. A number corresponding to the displayed value is displayed as the non-internally completed game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. It should be noted that when the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63, the value of the returning counter is cleared to "0". After that, the display content of the non-internal notification image G12 is changed so that the number corresponding to the value set in the returning counter after the addition of 1 is displayed in the non-internal completed game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. Update (step S1302).

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S1303). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the setting process at the start (FIG. 15) which is executed when one game is started. (step S603), and if the number of bets for the game is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first bet number command has been received from the main side MPU 72 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the "3" bet notification processing is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "3" bet notification completion flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1304: NO). After that (step S1305), the "3" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1306). In the "3" bet notification process, there is a 3-bet corresponding notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of "3" has been executed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand has been won. make it run. As a result, a message such as, for example, “3 sheets are required” is output from the speaker 62 . The “3” bet notification completion flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 3-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when a game with the number of bets of “3” is repeated. When the "3" bet notification completion flag is set to "1", the "3" bet notification processing is not executed, so that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. When a game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated in a situation, it is possible to prevent the 3-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, or if the process of step S1306 is executed, whether or not the first CB role has been won in the current game is determined from the information set in the game start command received this time. Determine (step S1307). If the first CB winning combination is won (step S1307: YES), processing for notifying when the first CB is won is executed (step S1308). In the processing for notification when the first CB is won, the notification of the winning of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, a message such as "winning the first CB role" is output from the speaker 62. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303, that is, if the number of bets for this game is "2" and the second bet number command has been received from the main side MPU 72, the "3" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1309). The "3" bet notified flag is also cleared to "0" when neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the second CB role has been won in the current game based on the information set in the game start command received this time (step S1310). If the 2nd CB is won (step S1310: YES), processing for notifying when the 2nd CB is won is executed (step S1311). In the process for notification when the second CB is won, the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as "winning the second CB role".

FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing the first CB internal medium notification process executed in step S1122 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1401). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the setting process at the start (FIG. 15) which is executed when one game is started. (step S603), and if the number of bets for the game is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1401, it is determined whether or not a second bet number command has been received from the main MPU 72. FIG.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notification processing is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification completion flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1402: NO). After that (step S1403), the "2" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1404). In the “2” bet notification process, a 2-bet corresponding notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of “2” has been executed in the winning state of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as, for example, "Two sheets are required." The “2” bet notification completion flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game with the number of bets “2” is repeated. By not executing the "2" bet notification process when the "2" bet notification completion flag is set to "1", the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the first CB combination. It is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated when the game is repeated.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1405). The "2" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the second CB internal middle notification process executed in step S1123 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 29).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1501). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the setting process at the start (FIG. 15) which is executed when one game is started. (step S603), and if the number of bets for the game is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1501, it is determined whether or not a second bet number command has been received from the main MPU 72.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notification processing is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification completion flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1502: NO). After that (step S1503), the "2" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1504). In the “2” bet notification processing, a 2-bet corresponding notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of “2” has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as, for example, "Two sheets are required." The “2” bet notification completion flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when a game with the number of bets of “2” is repeated. By not executing the "2" bet notification process when the "2" bet notification completion flag is set to "1", the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. It is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated when the game is repeated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, or if the processing of step S1504 is executed, processing for notifying when the second CB is won is executed (step S1505). In the process for notification when the second CB is won, the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as "winning the second CB role". By executing the process for notifying when the 2nd CB is won as described above, in the state where the 2nd CB is won, every time a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the notification corresponding to the winning of the 2nd CB is made. will be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1506). The "2" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

Next, the contents of the areas of the main RAM 74 to be initialized in the partial clear processing (step S104) and the full clear processing (step S105) in the main MPU 72 will be described.

FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 34, each storage area of the main RAM 74 is set with an address. The address is set as serial number information. Specifically, the address "0000" is set as the starting address, the address "0001" is set as the next address, and the address "0002" is set as the next address. The addresses are set so that the numbers are consecutive even after that.

A second CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the second CB winning data, is set as a storage area corresponding to the start address "0000". In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination, when the index value IV to which the 2nd CB winning data is set is won, the 2nd CB winning data is set in the 2nd CB winning data area, and when the 2nd CB winning is established, , the second CB winning data is cleared from the second CB winning data area.

A first CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the first CB winning data, is set as a storage area corresponding to "0001", which is next in order to the start address "0000". In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination, when the index value IV to which the first CB winning data is set is won, the first CB winning data is set in the first CB winning data area, and when the first CB winning is established, clears the first CB winning data from the first CB winning data area.

A setting value storage area, which is an area for storing setting values to be set, is set as a storage area corresponding to "0002" which is next in order to "0001". The set value selected in the set value update process (step S106) of the main process (FIG. 10) is stored in the set value storage area.

FIG. 35(a) is a flow chart showing the all clear processing executed in step S105 of the main processing (FIG. 10).

First, "0000", which is the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1601). Thereafter, a clear execution process is executed to clear the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1602).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next address in the address of the main RAM 74 (step S1603). As a result, if the target address was "0000", which is the start address, the target address becomes "0001", and if the target address was "0001", the target address becomes "0002". ”.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the target address updated by the address update processing corresponds to the end address (step S1604). The end address is an address corresponding to the next in order with respect to the final address set in the main RAM 74 . If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the process returns to step S1602. By repeating the processing of steps S1602 to S1604 in this way, all storage areas of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for clear execution processing in step S1602 in the current all clear processing. Thereafter, an all initialization command indicating that all clear processing has been executed for the main side RAM 74 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1606).

FIG. 35(b) is a flow chart showing the partial clear processing executed in step S104 of the main processing (FIG. 10).

First, "0001", which is the next address to the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1701). As a result, the second CB winning data area, which is a storage area corresponding to the start address "0000" of the main RAM 74, is excluded from the execution target of "0" clearing and from the execution target of the initialization process (step S1705). are also excluded. Thereafter, a clear execution process is executed to clear the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1702).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next address in the address of the main RAM 74 (step S1703). As a result, if the previous target address was "0001", which is the address next in order to the start address of the main RAM 74, the target address becomes "0002", and the previous target address becomes "0002". , the target address is "0003".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the target address updated by the address updating process corresponds to the end address (step S1704). The end address is an address corresponding to the next in order with respect to the final address set in the main RAM 74 . If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process returns to step S1702. By repeating the processing of steps S1702 to S1704 in this manner, all the storage areas of the main side RAM 74 other than the second CB winning data area, which is the storage area corresponding to the start address of the main side RAM 74, are stored. "0" is cleared.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for clear execution processing in step S1702 in the current partial clear processing. After that, a partial initialization command indicating that the partial clear processing has been executed for the main side RAM 74 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1706). In this case, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, a partial initialization command is issued with the information corresponding thereto set. sent.

Next, how the main MPU 72 executes the partial clearing process (step S104) and the all clearing process (step S105) will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 36(a) shows a period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 36(b) shows a period during which main processing (FIG. 10) is executed in the main MPU 72, c) shows the execution timing of the setting update start operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. FIG. 36(d) shows the execution of the RAM clearing operation in which the power switch 55 is turned ON while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned ON by the setting key and the reset button 56 is pressed. 36(e) shows a period during which the main MPU 72 is partially clearing (step S104), and FIG. 36(f) is a full clearing process (step S105) by the main MPU 72. is executed, FIG. 36(g) shows the period in which the first CB win is won, and FIG. 36(h) shows the period in which the second CB win is won.

First, when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started in a state where the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and the main side MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (FIG. 35(b)). will be explained.

At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key is being turned on by the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the reset button 56 is not being pressed. When the setting update start operation is performed, the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. Main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the MPU 72, and after that, as shown in FIG. is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36(h), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started while the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. A state in which winning data is stored is maintained. Note that the set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t3.

By executing the partial clearing process (FIG. 35(b)) when the setting update start operation is performed as described above, the operating power to the main side MPU 72 is reduced in the winning state of the second CB combination. Even if the set value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of is stopped, after the set value update process (step S106) is executed It is possible to maintain the winning state of the second CB combination. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall repeatedly executes the game with the number of bets "2" before the opening of the gaming hall to make the winning state of the second CB combination every time the set value is changed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that must be done.

Next, in a state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and the main MPU 72 executes all clear processing (FIG. 35(a)). A case will be described.

At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 36(d), the power switch 55 is turned on while the reset button 56 is pressed while the setting key is turned on as shown in FIG. 36(d). 36(a), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started at the timing of t4, and the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 36(b). The main processing (FIG. 10) is started at , and the main MPU 72 performs all clear processing (FIG. 35A) as shown in FIG. be done. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36(h), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74. Data will be erased. After timing t6, the set value update process (step S106) is executed.

When the RAM clearing operation is performed as described above, the all clearing process (FIG. 35(a)) is executed to erase the second CB winning data. When (a)) is executed, it is possible to create a situation in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. Then, when the game with the number of bets "3" is executed without winning the second CB combination, the first CB prize is established and the player can shift to the first CB state ST2 which is disadvantageous to the player. It will happen. As a result, it is possible to suppress the profit obtained by illegally performing the all clear processing (FIG. 35(a)).

Next, with the first CB winning data stored in the main RAM 74, supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (FIG. 35(b)). I will explain the case where

At the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key is being turned on by the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the reset button 56 is not being pressed. When the setting update start operation is performed, the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. The main processing (FIG. 10) is started by the MPU 72, and the partial clear processing is performed by the main MPU 72 (FIG. 35(b)) as shown in FIG. is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36(g), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74. Data will be erased. Note that the set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t9.

Even if the partial clearing process (FIG. 35(b)) is executed when the setting update start operation is performed as described above, the first CB winning data is erased, so that in the original game It is possible to cancel the state in which the first CB winning data is stored, which is not normal, when changing the set value.

<Regarding the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be explained. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, which is a process executed after completion of the win/loss determination of the win in the win lottery process (FIG. 16).

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 in the main side MPU 72, and when "1" is set in the second section flag, the second section SC2 , and the first section SC1 is when the value of the second section flag is "0". If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S1801: YES), the processing after step S1802 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806 and the lottery process for the number of unlocked games in step S1810 are not executed.

If the second interval flag is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: YES), the processing after step S1803 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and step S1810 The lottery process for the number of unlocked games is not executed.

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1803). If the number of bets for this game is "2" (step S1803: NO), the processing after step S1804 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct lottery process in step S1806, and the cancellation game in step S1810. The number lottery process will not be executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination (step S1804). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 16) for this combination is lost (step S1804: NO), the processes after step S1805 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is lost in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the process for setting it to the second section SC2 in step S1805 and the direct hit lottery process in step S1806 Also, the lottery process for the number of games to be unlocked in step S1810 is not executed.

In the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current role, if any index value IV is won (step S1804: YES), the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the main RAM 74 The continuous game number counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total winning number counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the are each cleared to "0" (step S1805). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

The number-of-continued-games counter 74c is for specifying the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. is a counter of When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, In the reached game, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d informs the main side MPU 72 of the restricted total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the “total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 cards) in the second section SC2, even during the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, In the reached game, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

After that, direct hit lottery processing is executed (step S1806). In the direct hit lottery process, a direct hit lottery table provided in the main side ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to win a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. do. In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role in this game, if the index value IV=11 is won, there is a 2% chance that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be won directly, and the index value IV=12 will be won. If the index value IV=13, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be directly hit with a probability of 10%, and the index value IV=13. If 14 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won directly with a probability of 5%, and if the index value IV=15 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won directly with a probability of 2%. . In this case, the probability of winning a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 increases as the index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1807: YES), the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1808). The first transition confirmation flag is for the main MPU 72 to specify that transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has been won in the direct lottery process (step S1806) executed when transitioning to the second section SC2. is a flag. When the first transition determination flag is set to "1", a process is executed to shift the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

After that, lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S1809). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1807: NO), a lottery process for the number of unlocked games is executed (step S1810). The number of unlocked games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the transition lottery process (step S2112), which will be described later, when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won. It is a counter for specifying In the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, first, the lottery table for the number of unlocked games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 . Then, the number of unlocked games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table of the number of unlocked games. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of unlocked games. In addition, the selection probabilities for each number of unlocked games are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a large number of games is set high, or the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a small number of games is set high. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which After executing the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, the number of unlocked games selected in the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is set in the unlocked game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1811). The unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the number of remaining unlocked games in the main MPU 72 .

Thereafter, a lighting lottery process for the section display section 67 is executed (step S1812). In the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67, the lighting lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to set the second section SC2 from the beginning. A lottery determines whether the section display section 67 is to be lit (that is, to be lit immediately) or that the section display section 67 is to be to be lit (that is, standby for lighting) upon transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 thereafter. In the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the role in this game, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 50%, and standby lighting is selected with a probability of 50%. is selected, and if the index value IV=11 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 65%, and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 35%. is selected with a probability of 62% and the standby mode is selected with a probability of 38%. When lighting standby is selected and index value IV=14 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 75% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 25% and index value IV=15 is won. , the immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 70%, and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 30%. Lighting standby is selected with a probability, and when index value IV=17 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 30% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 70%. In this case, the index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of selecting immediate lighting.

When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display section 67 (step S1813: YES), the lighting process of the section display section 67 is executed (step S1814). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display unit 67 (step S1813: NO), the lighting standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" ( step S1815). The lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second control process for the game section is executed at step S907 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. is executed after all

When "1" is set to the second section flag of the main side RAM74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S1901: YES), the state of the flag of the main side RAM74 is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the game state is the end preparation state ST6 (step S1902). The end preparation state ST6 is a case where the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, being satisfied, and the second section SC2 ends when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 occurs. It is a game state that shifts to .

If it is in the termination preparation state ST6 (step S1902: YES), it is determined whether or not the termination preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1903). The termination preparation completion flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST6. In the pseudo-bonus processing (step S905) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 21), the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 0, and the second interval is set when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed. When it is specified that the SC2 is to end, a flag is set to set the end preparation state ST6, and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0". In addition, in the AT process (step S906) in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 21), the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is 0, and the second section is played when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed. When it is specified that the SC2 is to end, a flag is set to set the end preparation state ST6, and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1904), and then the processing from step S1905 is executed. If the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6. In this case, a process for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed (step S1914). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the user stays in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 including the counter for storing the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is maintained. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the pseudo-bonus state flag) indicating that. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the user stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 including the counter for storing the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is indicated. By clearing various data (including the AT state flag), the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. Also, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any one of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and after that, The number of remaining games to be unlocked is reset at the time of a new shift to the second section SC2. Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S1915). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1916). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2.

If it is not the end preparation state ST6 (step S1902: NO), or if the processing of step S1904 is executed, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1905). As already described, the number-of-continued-games counter 74c informs the main MPU 72 of the number of times the game has been executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c after adding 1 is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S1906). If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S1914 and S1916 is executed. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is in the middle, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is forcibly terminated to enter the normal game state ST1, and AT If it is in the middle of the state ST5, the AT state ST5 is forcibly terminated and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

If the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S1906: NO), in the current game, is any one of the first chance replay winning, second chance replay winning and normal replay winning achieved? It is determined whether or not (step S1907). In this case, even if the number of bets in the current game is either "2" or "3", the determination in step S1907 is made, and the current game is normal game state ST1, first CB state ST2, second CB. Any gaming state of the state ST3, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S1907.

If none of the replay wins have been established (step S1907: NO), the number of bets for this game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1908). . In this case, even if a replay win was established in the previous game and the current game is a game corresponding to a replay due to the establishment of the replay win, the number of bets for this game (that is, the bet number setting counter 74a value) is subtracted from the total win counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d counts the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. This is a counter for identification by the main MPU 72 . As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the "total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

After that, in this game, any small role winning prize (1st to 9th supplementary prize, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize and cherry prize) ) is established (step S1909). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", the determination in step S1909 is made, and the current game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Any gaming state of the state ST3, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S1909. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1909, the number of game media provided in the current game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S1910).

When a negative determination is made in step S1909, or when the process of step S1910 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S1911). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S1911: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S1912).

As described above, in step S1908, the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d. Therefore, for example, in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, any small win is established. Otherwise, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than zero. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S1911, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S1912. As a result, "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" in the situation where no game medium is awarded)" to "the second section When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute the game while SC2 is being continued ("0" when the game is not being executed) is set as the predetermined difference number, Using the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as a predetermined reference value, the total net increase number with limitation of game media, which is the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d. becomes possible.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1911, or if the process of step S1912 is executed, does the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceed the upper limit net increase number "2400"? It is determined whether or not (step S1913). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1913, and processing for ending the second interval SC2 is executed in steps S1914 to S1916. The processing contents of steps S1914 to S1916 have already been described. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is in the middle, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is forcibly ended and the normal game state ST1 is entered, and AT If it is in the middle of the state ST5, the AT state ST5 is forcibly terminated and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

Here, if any of the replay prizes are established, affirmative determination is made in step S1907, and the processing of steps S1908 to S1912 is not executed. In a game in which a replay winning prize is established, the game media owned by the player at the start of the game is used for setting bets, but as a profit from the replay winning establishment, the same number of bets as in the game in which the replay winning prize was established A new game can be played again with the number of bets. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S1908 to S1912 in a game in which a replay winning has been established, in a game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change, the value of the total winning number counter 74d is calculated. It is possible to omit the execution of processing for changing , and it is possible to omit the execution of useless processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win has been established, it is determined in step S1913 whether or not the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". As a result, although the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game prior to the game in which the replay winning was established, the second Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 has not been executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game in which the subsequent replay winning has been established. , and the initialization process of the second section SC2 can be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1913, ending handling processing is executed (step S1917). FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the ending handling process.

First, it is determined whether or not the first ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2001). The first ending flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that there is a high possibility that the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2, which is counted using the number-of-continued-games counter 74c, will reach the upper limit number of games. is.

If the first ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2001: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 74, and the main It is determined whether or not the sum with the value of the AT continuation counter provided in the side RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 (step S2002). The pseudo-bonus continuation counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 by the main side MPU 72 . The AT continuation counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining continuation games in the AT state ST5 by the main side MPU 72 . The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is set to 1500 games as already explained. The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is not limited to 1,500 games, and may be less than 1,500 games or more than 1,500 games.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the first ending flag is set to "1" (step S2003). When the first ending flag is set to "1", the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 are not satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the remaining number of continuous games is added in the AT state ST5, details of which will be described later. does not occur, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1, the second section SC2 surely ends and shifts to the first section SC1. As a result, in a situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the transition condition to the AT state ST5 from being satisfied, and the rest of the continuation game in the AT state ST5. It is possible to prevent the further addition of the number from occurring.

After that, the first ending command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2004). The first ending command includes information on the number of games required to satisfy the ending condition of the second section SC2, that is, information corresponding to the difference between the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 and the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c. included.

By receiving the first ending command, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the main-side MPU 72 is in a situation where the first ending flag is set to "1". When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, and if the game state at that time is the AT state ST5, the first ending command is received. Triggered by this, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period. On the other hand, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet been started and the game state is not the AT state ST5, it shifts to the AT state ST5. In this case, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period. The situation in which the first ending flag is set to "1" basically occurs in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, but it can also occur in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. Further, even if the first ending flag is set to "1" in the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3 or the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game contents are not changed and the performance execution mode is not changed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, if a negative determination is made in step S2002, or if the process of step S2004 is executed, is the second ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 set to "1"? It is determined whether or not (step S2005). The second ending flag is for the main MPU 72 to specify that there is a high possibility that the limited total number of net additions of game media measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d will reach the upper limit number of net additions. is a flag.

If the second ending flag is not set to "1" (step S2005: NO), the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter is used to acquire game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5. It is determined whether or not the result obtained by adding the value obtained by accumulating the expected value to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2 (step S2006). The expected acquisition value of game media in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is about five. The upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 is set to 2400 sheets as already explained. Note that the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 is not limited to 2400 sheets, and may be less than 2400 sheets or more than 2400 sheets.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, the second ending flag is set to "1" (step S2007). When the second ending flag is set to "1", the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 are not satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the remaining number of continuous games is added in the AT state ST5, details of which will be described later. does not occur, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1, the second section SC2 surely ends and shifts to the first section SC1. As a result, in a situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the condition for transition to the AT state ST5 from being satisfied, and the remaining continuation game of the AT state ST5. It is possible to prevent further addition of the number from occurring.

After that, the second ending command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2008). The second ending command includes information on the total net increase in number of game media with a limit required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, that is, the value of the total acquired number counter 74d for the upper limit net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2. contains information corresponding to the difference between

By receiving the second ending command, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp the situation in which the second ending flag is set to "1" in the main-side MPU 72 . When the effect side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, and if the game state at that time is the AT state ST5, the second ending command is received. Triggered by this, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period. On the other hand, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started and the game state is not the AT state ST5, it shifts to the AT state ST5. In this case, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period. Incidentally, the situation in which the second ending flag is set to "1" occurs in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, but does not occur in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. Further, even if the second ending flag is set to "1" in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game contents are not changed, and the effect execution mode is not changed.

<Regarding normal game state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be explained. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an advantageous lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is a step that is executed after the win/loss determination is completed in the win lottery process (FIG. 16) and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section. It is executed in S710.

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 by the main side MPU 72, and there are cases where "1" is set in the second section flag. The second section SC2 is the first section SC1 when the value of the second section flag is "0". If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), the processing after step S2102 is not executed. As a result, when it is the first section SC1, the processing for shifting the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S2106 is not executed.

If the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5 (step S2102: YES), the advantageous state at the start of the game processing is executed (step S2103). Advantageous state processing at the start of the game will be described later.

If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES) and the gaming state is neither the pseudo-bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5 (step S2102: NO), the current game It is determined whether the state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2104). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2104: YES), the processing after step S2105 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the second section SC2, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing for shifting the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S2106 is not executed. .

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2104: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2105). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2105: NO), the processing after step S2106 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2, the processing for shifting the gaming state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S2106 is not executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2105: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is equal to or greater than the reference number of games (step S2106), and the total winning number counter It is determined whether or not the value of 74d is greater than or equal to the reference acquisition number (step S2107). As already described, the number-of-continued-games counter 74c informs the main MPU 72 of the number of times the game has been executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying When the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c reaches a value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second interval SC2, the reached game is determined even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. , the second section SC2 ends, and the first section SC1 enters the normal game state ST1. In addition, as already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d indicates the restricted total net increase of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying the number of sheets by the main MPU 72 . As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the “total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total win counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 cards) in the second section SC2, even during the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game reached , the second section SC2 ends, and the first section SC1 enters the normal game state ST1.

The reference number of games is set to be less than the upper limit of 1500 games for the second section SC2, specifically 1450 games. The reference acquisition number is set as a number smaller than 2400, which is the upper limit of net increase in the second section SC2, specifically 2150.

If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is greater than or equal to the reference number of games (step S2106: YES), or if the value of the total winning number counter 74d is greater than or equal to the standard winning number (step S2107: YES), "1" is set to the received third transition confirmation flag (step S2108). The third transition confirmation flag indicates that the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is greater than or equal to the reference number of games, or that the restricted total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2 is greater than or equal to the standard acquisition number. This is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed.

When the third transition determination flag is set to "1", a process is executed to transition the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the current game ends. That is, in the normal game state ST1, when the pre-end period, which is a period in which the fulfillment of the ending condition of the second section SC2 is near, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is forced. As a result, it is possible to provide the benefit of generating the pseudo-bonus state ST4 for reaching the pre-end period in the normal game state ST1. 50 games are set as the number of continuous games at the start of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is started when the third transition determination flag is set to "1". The number of continuous games set at the start is the number of games that is the difference between 1500 games, which is the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, and 1450 games, which is the reference number of games. In addition, since the expected acquisition value of game media in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is about 5 as already explained, the product of the number of continuous games set at the start and the expected acquisition value is the second interval. The difference between 2400, which is the upper limit net increase number of SC2, and 2150, which is the standard acquisition number, is the same or substantially the same.

After executing the process of step S2108, various clear processes are executed (step S2109). In various clearing processes, the values of the second transition confirmation flag and the transition standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0". The second transition confirmation flag is a flag that is set to "1" when the transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112) described later, and the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" in the transition waiting counter. This is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been completed. In the transition lottery process (step S2112), the transition lottery process (step S2112) not only sets the second transition confirmation flag to "1" but also sets a value corresponding to the number of transition standby games in the transition standby counter, thereby causing the second transition. The value of the transition waiting counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in a situation where the determination flag is set to "1". Then, when the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0" in a situation where "1" is set to the second transition confirmation flag, the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, after the transition lottery process (step S2112) wins the transition, the number of transition standby games is consumed, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs. In this case, when the third transition confirmation flag is set to "1" as described above, even if the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" at that time, the second transition confirmation flag is "0" is cleared. As a result, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 triggered by setting the third transition confirmation flag to "1" is changed to the pseudo-bonus state triggered by the second transition confirmation flag being set to "1". It becomes possible to give priority to the occurrence of ST4.

When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is less than the reference number of games and the value of the total win number counter 74d is less than the reference number of wins (steps S2106 and S2107: NO), the second transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 Under the condition that "1" is not set (step S2110: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV=11 to 15 has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination. (Step S2111). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2111, shift lottery processing is executed (step S2112). In the transition lottery process, a transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether to transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role in this game, if the index value IV=11 is won, there is a probability of 20% that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be won, and the index value IV=12 will be won. If the index value IV=13, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won with a probability of 40%, and the index value IV=13. If 14 is won, transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won with a 30% probability, and if index value IV=15 is won, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won with a 20% probability. . In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

If the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won in the transition lottery process (step S2113: YES), bonus type determination processing for determining the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed (step S2114). A big bonus with a relatively high degree of advantage and a regular bonus with a relatively low degree of advantage are set in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The big bonus is a pseudo-bonus state ST4 that continues until games with a bet number of "3" are played 50 times, and the regular bonus is a pseudo-bonus that continues until games with a bet number of "3" are played 20 times. This is state ST4. The number of games described above is arbitrary as long as the big bonus is relatively more advantageous than the regular bonus. In addition, if the big bonus is relatively more advantageous than the regular bonus, the number of games to be continued is the same for both bonuses, but the expected value of acquiring game media in one game is higher than the regular bonus. , the big bonus is relatively more advantageous than the regular bonus. The processing contents of the bonus type determination processing will be described later.

After that, the second transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2115), and the transition standby game number (specifically, 5 games) is set in the transition standby counter provided in the main RAM 74. is set (step S2116). The second transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition has been won in the transition lottery process (step S2112). This is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been completed after being set. In the transition lottery process (step S2112), the transition lottery process (step S2112) not only sets the second transition confirmation flag to "1" but also sets a value corresponding to the number of transition standby games in the transition standby counter, thereby causing the second transition. The value of the transition waiting counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in a situation where the determination flag is set to "1". Then, when the value of the transition standby counter becomes "0" in a situation where "1" is set to the second transition confirmation flag, the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, after the transition lottery process (step S2112) wins the transition, the number of transition standby games is consumed, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is executed at step S904 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the normal processing also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from rotating in one game. executed later.

When "1" is set in the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2201: YES), "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74. It is determined whether or not it is set (step S2202). At the start of the current game, when the transition to the second section SC2 has occurred and the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed at the time of determining the transition is a direct hit winning, the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1".

If "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag (step S2202: YES), the first start setting process is executed (step S2203). In the first start setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". In the first start setting process, a value corresponding to 50 games, which is the number of continuation games of the big bonus, is set as the initial number of continuation games in the quasi-bonus state ST4 in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 . That is, in a configuration in which a big bonus and a regular bonus having relatively high and low degrees of advantage are set as the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is entered by winning a direct hit in the direct lottery process (step S1806). In the case of shifting, it will shift to the big bonus. The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter mainly indicates the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. This is a counter for identification by the side MPU 72 .

After that, the first start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2204). The first start command is a command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has newly started in a situation where both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 are not set to "1". Further, the first start command includes information indicating that the current initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 50 games.

When receiving the first start command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, a moving image corresponding to the big bonus is displayed on the image display device 63, and a display indicating the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the number of game media obtained in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are displayed. display is performed. FIG. 42(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the first start command is received.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), the image display device 63 displays a moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in which both the first ending flag and the second ending flag are not set to "1". a first effect image G31 to be played, a number-of-games image G32 indicating the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and a win-number image G33 indicating the number of game media the player has won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. is displayed. In the first effect image G31, a moving image display is performed in which a predetermined character image is displayed in front of a predetermined background image, and the display modes of the predetermined background image and the predetermined character image change. In the game number image G32, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, the initial number of continued games is displayed, and after that, every time one game is completed and the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is decremented by one. 1 is subtracted from the number displayed in the number-of-games image G32. Further, when an addition to the remaining number of continuous games occurs in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a number corresponding to the number of games to be added is added to the number displayed in the number-of-games image G32. In the winning number image G33, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, "0 cards won" is displayed. increases, the increased number of game media is added to the number displayed in the acquired number image G33.

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 41), if the first transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2202: NO), the third transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". (step S2205). As already explained, the third transition confirmation flag is set when the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the reference number of games, or when the total net increase in the limited number of game media in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the reference acquisition number. This is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed due to the fact that

If "1" is set to the third transition confirmation flag (step S2205: YES), the second start setting process is executed (step S2206). In the second start setting process, the pseudo bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". In the second start setting process, a value corresponding to 50 games, which is the number of continuation games of the big bonus, is set as the initial number of continuation games in the quasi-bonus state ST4 in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 . That is, in a configuration in which a big bonus and a regular bonus having relatively high and low degrees of advantage are set as the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the reference number of games. In the case of shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 due to the fact that the limited total net increase number of game media in the 2-segment SC2 is equal to or greater than the reference acquisition number, the state shifts to the big bonus.

After that, the second start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2207). The second start command is a command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has newly started in a situation in which the ending condition is satisfied or in a situation in which the ending condition is likely to be satisfied. Further, the second start command includes information indicating that the current initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 50 games.

When the second start command is received, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the image display device 63 displays a moving image corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and also displays the number of game media acquired in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. However, unlike the case where the first start command is received, the display indicating the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not performed. Pseudo-bonus state ST4 due to the fact that the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is greater than or equal to the reference number of games, or that the total net increase in number of game media with limitation in the second section SC2 is greater than or equal to the reference acquisition number. , the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games before the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0", or the game media in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 may end with the end of the second section SC2. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied by not displaying the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as described above. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity.

FIG. 42(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the second start command is received. As shown in FIG. 42(b), in the image display device 63, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the reference number of games, or the limited total net increase in number of game media in the second section SC2 is obtained as a reference. A second effect image G41 in which a moving image corresponding to a situation in which the number is greater than or equal to the number is displayed, and a win count image G33 showing the number of game media the player has won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are displayed. there is In the second effect image G41, a moving image display is performed in which a specific character image is displayed in front of a specific background image, and the display modes of the specific background image and the specific character image change. In the winning number image G33, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started, "0 cards won" is displayed. increases, the increased number of game media is added to the number displayed in the acquired number image G33.

Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 41), if the third transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2205: NO), the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. It is determined whether or not (step S2208). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2208: YES), the processing after step S2209 is not executed. In the processing after step S2209, the number of games required for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is subtracted as one game is completed, and the conditions for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are established as the game is completed. If so, a process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, if the state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, by not executing the processing after step S2209, even if the game is completed in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, it is simulated. It is possible to avoid causing the shift to the bonus state ST4 to become closer.

When the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2208: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S2209). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2209: NO), the processing after step S2210 is not executed. As already explained, in the processing after step S2210, the number of games required for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is subtracted as one game is completed, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is performed as the game is completed. When the condition is established, the process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. In this case, if the game with the bet number of "2" is executed, the process from step S2210 onwards is not executed, so that even if the game with the bet number of "2" is completed, it will be false. It is possible to avoid causing the transition to the bonus state ST4 to become closer.

If the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S2209: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2210). As already explained, the second transition determination flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition lottery process (step S2112) has won the transition lottery.

When "1" is set to the second transition confirmation flag (step S2210: YES), the value of the transition standby counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2211). As already explained, the transition standby counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been completed after the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1". is. If the value of the transition standby counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2212: YES), the third start setting process is executed (step S2213). Although the details will be described later, in the third start setting process, a process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed.

After that, the first start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2214). The first start command includes information indicating that the number of initial continuous games is 50 if the present pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a big bonus, and if the present pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a regular bonus. For example, information indicating that the number of initial continuous games is 20 games is included.

When the first start command is received, the effect-side MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the number-of-games image G32, and the number-of-wins image G33 as shown in FIG. 42(a).

If the second transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2210: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the canceled game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2215). The number-of-released-games counter 74e is the number of games required to transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in a situation where none of the first to third transition confirmation flags of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". This is a counter for specifying the number of unlocked games in the main MPU 72 . When the game section shifts from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 and the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) does not result in a direct hit, the number of unlocked games is set to the counter 74e for the number of unlocked games, Also when the second section SC2 is maintained after the AT state ST5 ends, the number of unlocked games is set to the counter 74e for the number of unlocked games.

If the value of the unlocked game number counter 74e after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2216: YES), the third start setting process is executed (step S2213). Although the details will be described later, in the third start setting process, a process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed.

After that, the first start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2215). The first start command includes information indicating that the number of initial continuous games is 50 if the present pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a big bonus, and if the present pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a regular bonus. For example, information indicating that the number of initial continuous games is 20 games is included.

When the first start command is received, the effect-side MPU 92 sets the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the number-of-games image G32, and the number-of-wins image G33 as shown in FIG. 42(a).

When the process of step S2207 is executed, or when the process of step S2214 is executed, it is determined whether or not the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2217). As already described, the lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2. If the lighting standby flag is set to "1" (step S2217: YES), lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S2218). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that the current section is the second section SC2. Note that the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0" when the process of step S2220 is executed.

When the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs while the lighting standby flag is set to "1" as described above, the interval display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a game in which the net increase expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media given in one game") can be 1 or more. state. In other words, although the section display section 67 can be maintained in the off state even after transitioning to the second section SC2, it is surely turned on when the game state shifts to a game state in which the expected value of the net increase in game media can be 1 or more. . As a result, in a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is in question.

Next, a description will be given of an effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs during the transition waiting period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

The transition standby period is a period in which the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1" and the value of the transition standby counter is 1 or more. When five games are completed during the transition standby period, the state transitions to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the final game of the transition standby period, a pseudo-bonus state is obtained using the stop result after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have rotated. An effect can be executed that allows the player to recognize that the transition to the bonus state ST4 will occur.

Figures 43(a), 44(a) and 44(b) show the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the case where the lottery process (Figure 16) for the winning combination results in no win for any index value IV. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the symbols and combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the main line ML;

As shown in FIG. 43(a), when the lottery process (FIG. 16) results in a loss, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the order of middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated aiming at the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. stops (see FIG. 44(a)). Also, in the case where the lottery process (FIG. 16) results in a loss, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated aiming at the symbol, the combination of the symbol "Red 7", the symbol "Red 7" and the symbol "BAR" is stopped on the sub-line SL1 (Fig. 44 (b )reference).

The combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This does not occur except when the stop order of 32L, 32M and 32R is middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L. In addition, the event that the combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol is stop-displayed on the sub-line SL1 occurs when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost. This does not occur except when the stop order of 32L, 32M and 32R is middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R. Also, in the case where the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) results in a loss, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L and middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right. If the stop order is other than the reel 32R, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol will not be stopped and displayed on any of the main line ML and the sub lines SL1 to SL4. , the main line ML and the sub-lines SL1 to SL4 never stop displaying the combination of the "red 7" pattern, the "red 7" pattern and the "BAR" pattern.

FIG. 45(a) shows that a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs and the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is big when the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost in the final game of the transition waiting period. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the bonus is notified by the result of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R being stopped;

When the lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost in the final game during the transition standby period in which it is determined to shift to the big bonus, the image display device 63 displays the result as shown in FIG. 45(a1). , the display corresponding to the stopping order is performed in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. ” is displayed to indicate that the symbol should be aimed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 45(a2), the dual-use display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the stopping order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. done. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the order according to the information, as shown in FIG. 7" symbol combination is stopped and displayed. As a result, not only is the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 caused by the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but also that the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a big bonus is notified.

FIG. 45(b) shows that a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs and the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is regular when the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost in the final game of the transition waiting period. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a bonus is notified by the result of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R being stopped;

In the final game during the transition standby period in which it is determined to shift to the regular bonus, if the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) results in a loss, the image display device 63 displays as shown in FIG. 45(b1). , a display corresponding to the stopping order is performed in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. ” is displayed to indicate that the symbol should be aimed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 45(b2), the dual-use display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the stopping order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. done. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the order according to the notification, the symbols "RED 7", "RED 7" and "BAR" are displayed on the sub-line SL1 as shown in FIG. 45(b3). The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed. As a result, not only is the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 caused by the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but also that the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a regular bonus.

Figures 43(b), 44(c) and 44(d) show the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the main line when the index value IV = 16 is won in the winning lottery process (Figure 16). It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship with the combination of symbols that can be stopped in the ML.

As already explained, the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=16 that can be won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the gaming state that is not in the CB state (the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3). ing. As shown in FIG. 43(b), when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel. In the case of 32L, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated aiming at the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. ” The combination of symbols stops (see FIG. 44(c)).

In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination, when the index value IV=16 is won and the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is the middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is awarded. As shown in FIG. 43(b), combinations of symbols to be established include, in addition to combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "BAR" symbols, "replay", "replay" and " A combination of "Replay" symbols, a "Replay" symbol, a combination of "Red 7" symbols and "Replay" symbols, and a combination of "Replay" symbols, "Red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols are set. The "replay" symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so as not to cause a dropout. Therefore, when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) and the middle reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the symbol "red 7" could not be stopped on the main line ML. Even so, the "replay" symbols stop on the main line ML, and finally the "replay" symbols, the "replay" symbols and the combination of the "replay" symbols stop on the main line ML. Further, when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the symbol "RED 7" is stopped on the main line ML of the middle reel 32M, and then the right reel 32R is stopped for the second time. Even if the "BAR" symbol could not be stopped on the main line ML in the case of A combination of "replay" symbols will stop on the main line ML. In addition, when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the symbol "Red 7" is stopped on the main line ML of the middle reel 32M and "Red 7" is displayed on the main line ML of the right reel 32R. Even if the "red 7" symbol cannot be stopped on the main line ML when the left reel 32L is stopped at the third stop after the "BAR" symbol is stopped, the "replay" symbol is displayed on the main line ML. After stopping, the combination of the "replay" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol will finally stop on the main line ML. As a result, normal replay is performed even when the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "BAR" symbols are not stop-displayed on the main line ML due to the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. Winning a prize will surely be established.

As described above, when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L. The middle reel 32M is stopped so that the ``red 7'' symbol is prioritized over the ``replay'' symbol on the middle reel 32M and is stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the structure in which the normal replay winning prize is surely established. The right reel 32R is stopped and controlled so that the "BAR" symbol is preferentially displayed on the main line ML over the "REPLAY" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the left reel 32L is controlled to stop. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so that the "red 7" symbol is preferentially stopped and displayed on the main line ML over the "replay" symbol. Therefore, the combinations of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are likely to be stop-displayed on the main line ML.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel. In the case of 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated aiming at the "red 7" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "bell" are displayed on the main line ML. The combination of symbols stops. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44(d), the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol stops on the sub-line SL1.

In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination, when the index value IV=16 is won and the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is the middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R, the normal replay prize is awarded. As shown in FIG. 43(b), combinations of symbols to be established include "watermelon" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "bell" symbol, as well as "replay" symbol, "replay" symbol and "replay symbol". ” A combination of symbols is set. The "replay" symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R so as not to cause a dropout. Therefore, when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) and the middle reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the symbol "red 7" could not be stopped on the main line ML. Even so, the "replay" symbols stop on the main line ML, and finally the "replay" symbols, the "replay" symbols and the combination of the "replay" symbols stop on the main line ML. As a result, even if the combination of the "watermelon" pattern, the "red 7" pattern and the "bell" pattern is not stop-displayed on the main line ML in relation to the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the normal replay wins. will surely be established.

The "watermelon" symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L so as not to cause any omission, and the "bell" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that no omission occurs. Therefore, when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) and the middle reel 32L is stopped for the first time, the symbol "Red 7" can be stopped on the main line ML. In this case, when the left reel 32L is stopped as the second stop and the right reel 32R is stopped as the third stop, "Watermelon" is displayed on the main line ML regardless of the operation timing of the left stop button 42 and the right stop button 44. The combination of symbols, "Red 7" and "Bell" symbols is stopped. However, while six "watermelon" symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L, only one "red 7" symbol is arranged on the left reel 32L, and five "bell" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R. While the symbols are arranged, only one "Red 7" symbol is arranged on the right reel 32R. Therefore, even if the combination of "watermelon", "red 7" and "bell" symbols stops on the main line ML, "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" on the sub line SL1 It is possible that the combination of symbols is not statically displayed.

As described above, when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R. The middle reel 32M is stopped so that the 'red 7' symbol is prioritized over the 'replay' symbol on the middle reel 32M and is stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the structure in which the normal replay prize is surely established. control is performed. Therefore, the combination of the "watermelon", "red 7" and "bell" symbols is likely to be stopped and displayed on the main line ML, and as a result, the "red 7", "red 7" and The combination of "red 7" symbols is more likely to be stop-displayed.

The combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on the main line ML when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 16). , the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped only in the following order: middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L. In addition, the event that the combination of the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the sub-line SL1 wins the index value IV=16 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). This does not occur except when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R. In addition, when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L and middle reel 32M→left reel. If the stop order is 32L→right reel 32R, as shown in FIG. Neither the main line ML nor the sub lines SL1 to SL4 stop displaying the “red 7” pattern, the “red 7” pattern and the “red 7” pattern combination, and the main line ML and the sub lines SL1 to SL4 None of the combinations of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed.

In the final game of the transition standby period, when the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role is won with the index value IV=16, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs and the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a big bonus. 45(b1), the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the left reel, as shown in FIG. 45(b1). A display corresponding to the stop order in which the reel 32L is the reel 32L and the third stop is the right reel 32R is displayed, and a display indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 45(b2), the dual-use display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the stopping order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. done. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the order according to the notification, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are displayed on the sub-line SL1 as shown in FIG. 44(d). ” symbol combination is displayed.

In the final game of the transition standby period, when the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role is won with the index value IV=16, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs and the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a regular bonus. 45(a1), the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the right reel, as shown in FIG. 45(a1). A display corresponding to the stop order in which the reel 32R is the reel 32R and the third stop is the left reel 32L is displayed, and a display indicating that the symbol "RED 7" should be aimed at on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 45(a2), the dual-use display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the stopping order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. done. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the order according to the notification, the symbols "RED 7", "RED 7" and "BAR" are displayed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 44(c). ” symbol combination is displayed.

As described above, when the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination results in a loss, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of the middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L. A combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols can be stopped and displayed on the ML, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R. In this case, a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "BAR" symbols can be stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. In addition, when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L. A combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols can be stopped and displayed on the main line ML, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R. In this case, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on the sub-line SL1. Therefore, in the final game of the transition standby period, if the lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost or if the index value IV=16 is won, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is used to perform the transition. It is possible to notify whether the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to be executed is a big bonus or a regular bonus.

In the final game of the transition waiting period, when the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is lost or the index value IV=16 is won and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, A display corresponding to the notified stop order is performed on the combined display unit 66 . As a result, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63 whose display is controlled by the production side MPU 92, the shared display section 66 whose display is controlled by the main side MPU 72 corresponds to it. It is possible to make the display to be performed. However, it is not limited to this, and in the final game of the transition waiting period, the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination is lost or the index value IV = 16 is won, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed on the image display device 63. Even when the order of stopping is notified, the display corresponding to the order of stopping may not be displayed on the combined display section 66 . For example, the dual-purpose display unit 66 may be configured to remain in the off state, or the dual-purpose display unit 66 may be configured to perform display that does not correspond to the stop order.

In the final game of the transition waiting period, when the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost, if the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L, a big bonus. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R, a stop result indicating regular bonus is displayed. On the other hand, in the final game of the transition waiting period, if the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is won with the index value IV=16, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left. If the reel 32L, a stop result indicating a regular bonus is displayed, and if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R, a stop indicating a big bonus is displayed. Results are displayed. In other words, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for displaying the stop result indicating the big bonus and the regular bonus in the case of the outlier result and in the case of winning with the index value IV=16. The relation of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for displaying the stopping result indicating is reversed. Thus, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is reported in the final game of the transition waiting period, the reported stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be either the big bonus or the regular bonus. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the corresponding stop result is displayed.

A specific processing configuration for executing the notification as described above will be described below. FIG. 46(a) is a flow chart showing the bonus type determination process executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. The bonus type determination process is executed at step S2114 in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 40) at the start of the game.

First, bonus type lottery processing is executed (step S2301). In the bonus type lottery process, a type lottery table provided in the main-side ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main-side RAM 74 are used to determine the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that has been won this time as a big bonus. and regular bonus. The type lottery table is set so that the selection probability of the big bonus and the regular bonus is 50% regardless of the result of the lottery process (Fig. 16) for this role, but it is not limited to this. Alternatively, the big bonus may have a higher selection probability than the regular bonus, or the regular bonus may have a higher selection probability than the big bonus. The selection ratio of the big bonus and the regular bonus may vary depending on.

When the regular bonus is selected in the bonus type lottery process (step S2302: NO), the big winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2307). When the big bonus is selected in the bonus type lottery process (step S2302: YES), the big win flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2303). The big winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the big bonus has been selected in the bonus type lottery process.

After that, reel effect lottery processing is executed (step S2304). The reel effect is that, in the situation where it is decided to shift to the big bonus, the stop result indicating that the final game of the transition standby period is a regular bonus is once displayed, and then the start game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is an effect that stops and displays a combination of symbols indicating a big bonus at the start of the game. In the reel effect lottery process, a reel effect lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine whether or not to execute the reel effect. The reel effect lottery table is set so that reel effect winning is possible with a probability of 30%, but this probability is arbitrary. If the reel effect is won (step S2305: YES), the reel effect occurrence flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2306). The reel effect generation flag is a flag for specifying that the main side MPU 72 should generate a reel effect.

FIG. 46(b) is a flow chart showing the third start setting process executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. The third start setting process is executed at step S2213 in the normal process (FIG. 41).

First, "1" is set to the pseudo-bonus status flag in the main RAM 74 (step S2401). After that, it is determined whether or not the big win flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", or whether or not the value of the canceled game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S2402). As already explained, in the case where transition is won in the transition lottery process (step S2112), when the big bonus is selected in the bonus type lottery process (step S2301) in the bonus type determination process (FIG. 46), the big win is made. "1" is set to the flag. As already explained, the unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for counting the number of unlocked games in the main MPU 72. When the value of the unlocked game number counter 74e is "0", the number of unlocked games is "0". ” means that an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has occurred.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, "50" is set in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S2403). As a result, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurring this time becomes a big bonus. Thereafter, regardless of whether or not the big winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the big winning flag is cleared to "0" (step S2404). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2402, the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "20" (step S2405). As a result, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurring this time becomes a regular bonus.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing stop order notification control processing executed by the main MPU 72 . The stop order notification control process is performed in step S712, which is a process that is executed after completion of the win/loss determination in the win lottery process (FIG. 16) and after the first control process (step S711) of the game section. executed.

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 (step S2501: YES), an advantageous state notification control process is executed (step S2502). In the advantageous state notification control process, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won in the lottery process (Fig. 16), the number of bets for this game is "3". On the condition that the winning of the first bell is made possible, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables the winning of the first bell, is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the winning of the first bell is made possible. A command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be set is notified by the image display device 63. It should be noted that if the number of bets in the current game is "2", it is assumed that one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5. Also, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported on the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported in the same manner as when the number of bets is "3". may be configured to be executed.

In the advantageous state notification control process, if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won in the lottery process (Fig. 16), the number of bets for this game is "3". Under the condition that the winning of the second bell is possible, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the winning of the second bell is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the winning of the second bell is enabled. A command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be set is notified by the image display device 63. It should be noted that if the number of bets in the current game is "2", it is assumed that one of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5. Also, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported on the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported in the same manner as when the number of bets is "3". may be configured to be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the value of the transition standby counter in the main RAM 74 is "1" (step S2503). As already explained, the transition standby counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the number of transition standby games (specifically, 5 games) has been played since the second transition confirmation flag was set to "1". is a counter. A situation in which the value of the transition standby counter is "1" means that the current game is the final game of the transition standby period. If the value of the transition standby counter is not "1" (step S2503: NO), the stop order notification control process is terminated without executing the processes after step S2504. Therefore, the processes after step S2504 are not executed in games other than the final game during the transition waiting period.

If the value of the transition standby counter is "1" (step S2503: YES), it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the combination in the current game is a losing result (step S2504). If the result is a loss (step S2504: YES), the reel effect generation flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2505: NO), and the big win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If it is set (step S2506: YES), processing for setting the display data for center→right→left is executed (step S2507). As a result, a display corresponding to the stopping order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L is started on the combined display section 66. FIG. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, a command for center→right→left is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2508). When the MPU 92 on the production side receives the middle→right→left command, it displays a display corresponding to the stopping order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Cause display 63 to start. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

When "1" is set in the reel effect occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2505: YES), or when "1" is not set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2506: NO), Setting processing of the display data for center→left→right is executed (step S2509). As a result, a display corresponding to the stopping order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R is started. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, a command for center→left→right is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2510). When the MPU 92 on the production side receives the middle→left→right command, it displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The image display device 63 is caused to start. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S2504, it is determined whether or not the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the combination in this game has been won with index value IV=16 (step S2511). If a win is made with the index value IV=16, the reel effect generation flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2512: NO), and the big win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If it is set (step S2513: YES), processing for setting the display data for center→left→right is executed (step S2514). As a result, a display corresponding to the stopping order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R is started. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, a command for center→left→right is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2515). When the production side MPU 92 receives the command for center→left→right, it displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The image display device 63 is caused to start. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

If "1" is set in the reel effect occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2512: YES), or if "1" is not set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2513: NO), A process of setting display data for center→right→left is executed (step S2516). As a result, a display corresponding to the stopping order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L is started on the combined display section 66. FIG. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, a command for center→right→left is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2517). When the MPU 92 on the production side receives the middle→right→left command, it displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Cause display 63 to start. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing a normal effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The normal effect control process is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

When the command for center→right→left is received (step S2601: YES), setting processing for effect for center→right→left is executed (step S2602). In the processing for setting the middle→right→left effect, the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Execute the process to start. After that, "1" is set to the fixed effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2603). The fixed effect flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed has been executed.

If the center→left→right command has been received (step S2604: YES), processing for setting the center→left→right effect is executed (step S2605). In the processing for setting the middle→left→right effect, the image display device 63 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. Execute the process to start the After that, "1" is set to the fixed effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2606).

If the first start command or the second start command is received (step S2607: YES), it is determined whether or not the fixed effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2608). The first start command and the second start command are transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started as already explained. That is, in step S2608, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started after the effect indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed.

When "1" is not set to the fixed effect flag (step S2608: NO), the setting process of the fixed effect is executed (step S2609). In the fixed effect setting process, a process for causing the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to perform the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started is executed.

If affirmative determination is made in step S2608, or if the process of step S2609 is executed, if the first start command is received (step S2610: YES), the first setting process of the bonus start effect is executed. (Step S2611). On the other hand, if the second start command has been received (step S2610: NO), the second setting process for the bonus start effect is executed (step S2612).

In the first setting process (step S2611) of the bonus start effect, information on the number of initial continuous games included in the first start command received this time (specifically, 50 game or 20 game information). The production side comprehension counter is a counter for the production side MPU 92 to specify the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 counted by the main side MPU 72 . Also, in the first bonus start effect setting process (step S2611), the first pseudo-bonus data table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94 . By controlling the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the first pseudo-bonus data table, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 does not exceed the reference number of games, and The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute an effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the total net increase number of game media with limitation in SC2 is not equal to or greater than the reference acquisition number. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the first effect image G31, the number-of-games image G32, and the number-of-wins image G33 as shown in FIG. 42(a). In the first pseudo-bonus data table, data are set that enable execution of effects corresponding to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games). If it continues, the first data in the first pseudo-bonus data table will be referred to again.

In the bonus start effect second setting process (step S2612), the effect-side grasping counter of the effect-side RAM 94 stores information on the number of initial continuous games included in the second start command received this time (specifically, 50 games). information). In addition, in the bonus start effect second setting process (step S2612), the second pseudo-bonus data table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94 . By controlling the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 according to the second pseudo-bonus data table, the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the reference number of games, or the second section SC2 The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute an effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the situation where the total net increase number of game media with limitation is equal to or greater than the reference acquisition number. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the second effect image G41 and the acquisition number image G33 as shown in FIG. 42(b). In the second pseudo-bonus data table, data are set that enable execution of effects corresponding to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games). If it continues, the first data in the second pseudo-bonus data table will be referred to again.

Note that when the first setting process of the bonus start effect (step S2611) or the second setting process of the bonus start effect (step S2612) is executed after the setting process of the fixed effect (step S2609) is executed, the pseudo After the effect indicating that the bonus state ST4 is started is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started.

In the normal effect control process, other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S2613). In other processes, processes for executing effects different from the above effects are executed in the normal game state ST1.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing reel effect processing executed by the main MPU 72 . As already described, the reel effect processing is executed in step S803 when it is determined in step S801 of the reel control processing (FIG. 20) that the current game is the start game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. That is, the reel effect processing is executed at the start of the first game when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started.

In the reel effect processing, first, by determining whether or not the reel effect generation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the previous game is the final game of the transition waiting period and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is set as a big bonus. A combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (specifically, "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) as a result of the stoppage of the previous game despite the decision to shift to . is stopped and displayed (step S2701). If the reel effect generation flag is set to "1" (step S2701: YES), the reel effect generation flag is cleared to "0" (step S2702).

After that, reel effect processing is executed (step S2703). In the reel effect processing, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started rotating, a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (specifically, a “red 7” symbol, a “red 7” symbol, and a “red 7” symbol are displayed on the main line ML). 7" symbol) is stopped and the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is stopped at the same time.

FIGS. 50(a) to 50(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of reel effects. In the final game of the transition waiting period, the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination results in a loss, and the reel effect lottery process (step S2304) wins the reel effect. 50(a), a combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (specifically, a “red 7” symbol, a “red 7” symbol and "BAR" symbol combination) is stopped and displayed.

A new game is then started. This new game is the starting game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. When a new game is started, all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate as shown in FIG. 50(b). The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R continues for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds).

After that, as shown in FIG. 50(c), the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus on the main line ML (specifically, the “red 7” symbol, the “red 7” symbol and the “red 7” symbol) stops. Rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is stopped at the same time in the displayed state. As a result, the player is notified that the current pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not a regular bonus but a big bonus. It should be noted that the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are maintained in a disabled state while the above-described reel effects are being executed.

Returning to the description of the reel effect processing (FIG. 49), when the reel effect occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2701: NO), or when the process of step S2703 is executed, rotation starts. Processing is executed (step S2704). In the rotation start process, the same process as step S802 in the reel control process (FIG. 20) is executed. Specifically, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game. waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 . By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S207 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42-44. Players and the like are notified of this.

FIG. 51 is a time chart showing how the fact that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped is notified of the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. FIG. 51(a) shows the period during which one game is being executed, FIG. 51(b) shows the period during which the big winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and FIG. FIG. 51(d) shows the period during which the transition game to the bonus state ST4 is being executed, and FIG. The period during which the notification indicating the stop order (hereinafter referred to as middle→right→left notification) in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, is executed. FIG. 51(f) shows the stopping order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R on the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66. 51(g) shows the period during which the notification (hereinafter referred to as middle→left→right notification) is being performed, and FIG. 51(g) is the period during which the reel effect is being performed.

First, a description will be given of the case where the reel effect is not executed when the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost in the final game of the transition standby period in the situation where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is the big bonus, has been determined. do.

A new game is executed as shown in FIG. 51(a) from timing t1 to timing t2. Transition lottery processing (step S2112) executed at the start of the game results in transition winning, and a bonus type lottery processing (step S2301) executed in the bonus type determination processing (Fig. 46(a)) results in a big win. A bonus is selected. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the big winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" at the timing of t1. However, in the reel effect lottery process executed in the bonus type determination process (FIG. 46(a)), reel effect winning is not achieved.

After that, the game is repeatedly executed in the transition standby period, and the transition game to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. final game is executed. The winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the game results in a loss. In this case, the big winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. "1" is not set to the reel effect generation flag of . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51(e), from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, the notification of middle → right → left is executed so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus can be stopped and displayed. be done. In addition, as already explained, in the center→right→left notification, the notification indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at is also executed.

By stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in accordance with the notification, a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are informed that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will occur, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R indicate that the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a big bonus. is notified by the stop result of After that, at the timing of t5, the first game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(d).

In addition, in a situation where the big win flag is set to "1" but the reel effect generation flag is not set to "1", the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is performed in the final game of the transition waiting period. When the index value IV=16 is won by the above method, the center→left→right notification is executed. As already explained, in the center->left->right notification, the notification indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at is also executed. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R according to the notification, a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the sub-line SL1. Also, in the final game of the transition waiting period, if an index value IV other than "16" is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 16), either middle→right→left or middle→left→right is announced. is not executed either.

Next, in the final game of the transition standby period in the situation where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is the big bonus, is determined, reel effects are executed when the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost. A case will be described.

A new game is executed as shown in FIG. 51(a) from timing t6 to timing t7. Transition lottery processing (step S2112) executed at the start of the game results in transition winning, and a bonus type lottery processing (step S2301) executed in the bonus type determination processing (Fig. 46(a)) results in a big win. A bonus is selected. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the big winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" at the timing of t6. Also, the reel effect generation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" by winning the reel effect in the reel effect lottery process executed in the bonus type determination process (FIG. 46(a)).

After that, the game is repeatedly executed in the transition standby period, and the transition game to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. final game is executed. The winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the game results in a loss. In this case, the big win flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. "1" is set in the generation flag. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51(f), from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9, the notification of middle→left→right is executed to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus. be done. In addition, as already explained, in the center->left->right notification, the notification indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at is also executed. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R according to the notification, a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed on the subline SL1. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are informed that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will occur, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R indicate that the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is regular bonus. informed by the stop result.

After that, at the timing of t10, the first game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 51(a) and 51(d). In this case, since the reel effect generation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the timing shown in FIG. A reel effect is executed as shown in (g). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 50(a) to 50(c), a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "BAR" symbols is stopped on the sub-line SL1. After the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (specifically, The rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is simultaneously stopped in a state in which "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the current pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not a regular bonus but a big bonus.

After that, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate again, and after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are accelerated and rotated at a constant speed, the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is changed from the disabled state to the enabled state. Then, when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination is executed. After that, at the timing of t12, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 51(a).

In addition, in a situation where the big win flag is set to "1" and the reel effect generation flag is set to "1", the index value is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the final game during the transition waiting period. If IV=16 is won, middle→right→left notification is executed. As already explained, in the center→right→left notification, the notification indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at is also executed. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R according to the notification, a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. After that, when the first game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols is stop-displayed on the main line ML as a reel effect. All the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate from the situation, and after the rotation is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (specifically, The rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is simultaneously stopped in a state where "Red 7" symbols, "Red 7" symbols and "Red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed.

<Regarding Advantageous Playing State>
Next, the details of processing in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and AT state ST5 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the advantageous state processing at the start of the game, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . As already explained, the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed after the win/loss determination is completed in the lottery process (FIG. 16) and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section. It is executed in step S710, which is a process. Then, the advantageous state processing at the start of the game is executed in step S2103 in the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (FIG. 40).

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S2801). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2801: NO), the processes after step S2802 are not executed. As a result, even if the player is in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, in the game in which the number of bets is "2", the processing after step S2802 is not executed.

When the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2801: YES), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2802). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2802: YES), the processing after step S2803 is not executed. As a result, even if the pseudo-bonus state flag or the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", if the state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing after step S2803 is executed. will not be executed.

If the current gaming state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2802: NO), it is determined whether or not the pseudo bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S2803). If the current gaming state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S2803: NO), it means that the current gaming state is the AT state ST5, so the AT state processing at the start of the game is executed (step S2804). . The AT state processing at the start of the game will be described later.

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S2803: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 ( step S2805). As already described, the first ending flag is for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2, which is counted using the continuous game number counter 74c, reaches the upper limit number of games. is a flag. As already explained, the second ending flag indicates by the main MPU 72 that there is a high possibility that the limited total number of net additions of game media measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d will reach the upper limit number of net additions. This is a flag for specifying. If "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag (step S2805: YES), the processes after step S2806 are not executed. As a result, in a situation where the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where there is a high possibility that the total number of net increases with restrictions on the number of game media will reach the upper limit, the The process for determining whether to shift to the AT state ST5 is not executed.

If "1" is not set to both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S2805: NO), whether or not "1" is set to the AT transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is determined (step S2806). The AT transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the condition for transition to the AT state ST5 has already been satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4. If the AT transition confirmation flag has already been set to "1" (step S2806: YES), it means that the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 have already been satisfied in the current pseudo bonus state ST4, so step S2807. The process for determining whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5 is not executed thereafter.

If "1" is not set in the AT transition confirmation flag (step S2806: NO), any one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. Under this condition (step S2807: YES), AT shift lottery processing is executed (step S2808). In the AT shift lottery process, the AT shift lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to shift to the AT state ST5 after the current pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. A lottery will decide whether or not to allow it. In the lottery process (Fig. 16) of the role in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 20% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 12 is won, has a probability of 10% to win the AT transition, and if you win the index value IV = 13, you will win the AT transition with a probability of 40%, and if you win the index value IV = 14, you will have a 30% chance. AT shift wins with a probability, and when the index value IV=15 is won, AT shift wins with a probability of 20%. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning an AT transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the AT transition is won (step S2809: YES), the AT transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2810). After that, an AT transition winning command indicating that the AT transition has been won is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2811). When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the AT transition winning command, the performance indicating that the AT transition winning has been executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁

Next, the pseudo-bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The pseudo-bonus processing is executed at step S905 in the corresponding processing (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the pseudo-bonus processing also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from rotating in one game. is executed after

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S2901). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2901: NO), the processing after step S2902 is not executed. As a result, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 53) itself is not executed. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the transition to the CB state occurs in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is resumed from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the end of the CB state. .

If the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S2901: YES), the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2902). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2903). When the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2903: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the AT shift confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 (step S2904).

If the AT shift confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2904: YES), it means that the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 have been met in the current pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo-bonus status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2905). After that, information corresponding to the initial number of continued games in the AT state ST5, ie, "50" is set in the AT state counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2906). Also, the AT status flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2907). Then, an AT shift command indicating that the shift to the AT state ST5 occurs is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2908). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the AT transition determination flag is not set to "1" (step S2904: NO), the process of setting the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S2909). In the setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST6 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. Also, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2910). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6.

As already described in the end preparation state ST6, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", the process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met is executed, and the second control process of the game section in the current game ( FIG. 38) ends. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended ends.

After executing the processing of step S2910, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2911). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended.

FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing AT state processing executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. As already described, the AT state processing at the start of the game is executed at step S2804 in the advantageous state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 52).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3001). As already explained, the first ending flag is for specifying in the main MPU 72 that the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2, which is counted using the number-of-continued-games counter 74c, reaches the upper limit number of games. is a flag. As already explained, the second ending flag indicates by the main MPU 72 that there is a high possibility that the limited total number of net additions of game media measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d will reach the upper limit number of net additions. This is a flag for specifying. If "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag (step S3001: YES), the processes after step S3002 are not executed. As a result, in a situation where the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where there is a high possibility that the total net increase in the number of game media with restrictions will reach the upper limit, the Processing for increasing the number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is not executed.

If "1" is not set to both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether the value of the additional period counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the current state is the additional period in the AT state ST5 (step S3002). The add-on period counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is an add-on period and the number of remaining games to be played during the add-on period.

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S3002: NO), one of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. (step S3003: YES), the transition lottery process for the additional period is executed (step S3004). In the addition period transition lottery process, the addition period transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to add the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5. It is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the additional period in which is likely to occur. In the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the winning combination in this game, if the player wins with the index value IV=11, there is a 10% chance that the player wins during the additional period, and the player wins with the index value IV=12. In this case, there is a 5% probability that the player will be selected for the transition to the additional period, and if the index value IV=13 is won, there is a 20% chance that the player will be selected for the transition to the additional period and the index value IV=14 will be selected. In this case, there is a probability of 15% that the player will be selected for the transition to the additional period. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning during the additional period. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the event that the transition to the additional period is won (step S3005: YES), the process of adding the number of continued games is executed (step S3006). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games equal to or greater than the number of continuous games for which the additional period continues is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 . Specifically, the additional period continues over 10 games, and in step S3006, 20 games, which is the number of games equal to or greater than 10 games, is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 from becoming "0" in the middle of the additional period.

After that, the first addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3007). The first addition command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the number of games has been added when the transition is made to the addition period. In addition, the first addition command includes information on 20 games, which is the number of games to be added this time. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first addition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute an effect indicating that the number of games has been added at the time of transition to the addition period. do. After that, "1" is set to the additional winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S3008). The add-on win flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the move win for the add-on period has been won in the move-on lottery process for the add-on period (step S3004).

If the transition lottery process for the additional period (step S3004) does not win the transition to the additional period (step S3005: NO), the first additional lottery process is executed (step S3009). In the first additional lottery process, the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is increased by using the first additional lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74. A lottery determines whether or not to generate a different addition. When index value IV=11 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 10%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 70%. Out of probability. When index value IV=12 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 5%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 5%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 5%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 85%. Out of probability. When index value IV=13 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 20%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 20%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 20%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 40%. Out of probability. When the index value IV=14 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 15%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 15%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 15%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 55%. Out of probability. When index value IV=15 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 10%, 50 games are selected with a probability of 10%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 10%. Out of probability. In this case, the index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning on top. Also, the lower the probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the higher the expected value of the number of games to be added to the index value IV. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

If any of 10 games, 20 games, and 50 games is selected in the first addition lottery process (step S3009) and an addition win is won (step S3010: YES), the process of adding the number of continued games is executed (step S3011). In the process of adding the number of continued games, the number of games selected in the first addition lottery process (step S3009) is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM74. After that, the second addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3012). The second addition command is for causing the effect side MPU 92 to recognize that the addition winning was made in the first addition lottery processing (step S3009) and the number of addition games selected in the first addition lottery processing (step S3009). The second addition command includes information corresponding to the number of additional games selected in the first additional lottery process (step S3009). When receiving the second addition command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the number of games has been increased.

If the value of the add-on period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, indicating that the add-on period has elapsed (step S3002: YES), the index value IV=any one of 11 to 15 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. (step S3013: YES), loop lottery generation lottery processing is executed (step S3014). A loop lottery is a state in which an addition lottery process for determining whether or not to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is repeatedly executed within one game until an end condition is satisfied. In the loop lottery generation lottery process, a loop lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to generate the loop lottery. . In the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the winning combination in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 15% probability that the loop lottery will be won, and the index value IV = 12 will be won. If the index value IV=13, the loop lottery will be won with a probability of 25%, and the index value IV=14 will be won. If the index value IV=15, the loop lottery will be won with a probability of 15%. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning in the loop lottery. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

If the loop lottery is generated and won (step S3015: YES), the number of continuous games is added (step S3016). In the process of adding the number of continued games, 10 games are added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 . After that, a loop lottery start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3017). The loop lottery start command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the loop lottery has been generated and won. In addition, the loop lottery start command includes information on 10 games, which is the number of games to be added this time. When receiving the loop lottery start command, the performance side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the performance indicating that the loop lottery has started. After that, the loop lottery flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3018). The loop lottery flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the loop lottery has been generated and won in the loop lottery generation lottery process.

If it is the add-on period (step S3002: YES), and no one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the role in this game (step S3013: NO ), or when the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) does not result in a loop lottery generation lottery (step S3015: NO), the second addition lottery process is executed (step S3019). In the second addition lottery process, the second addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to add to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5. The number of games will be determined by lottery.

In the second addition lottery process (step S3019), if an index value IV other than the index value IV=11 to 15 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 80%, and 20 games are selected with a probability of 10%. 50 games are selected with a probability of 10%. When the index value IV=11 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 50%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 25%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 25%. When the index value IV=12 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 60%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 20%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 20%. When the index value IV=13 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 20%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 40%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 40%. When the index value IV=14 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 30%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 35%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 35%. When the index value IV=15 is won, 10 games are selected with a probability of 50%, 20 games are selected with a probability of 25%, and 50 games are selected with a probability of 25%. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination, the higher the expected value of the number of games to be added. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

After that, the number of continued games is added (step S3020). In the continuous game number addition process, the number of games selected in the second addition lottery process (step S3019) is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM74. After that, the third addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3021). The third addition command is a command for causing the effect side MPU 92 to recognize the number of additional games selected in the second addition lottery process (step S3019). ) contains information corresponding to the number of additional games selected in . When receiving the third addition command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the number of games has been increased.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU 72 . The AT process is executed in step S906 in the corresponding process (FIG. 21) at the end of the game. As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game, the AT processing also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from rotating in one game. executed later.

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S3101). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3101: NO), the processing after step S3102 is not executed. As a result, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of continued games in the AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and furthermore, the remaining number of additional games in the AT state ST5 The number of continuous games is not subtracted.

In addition, since the AT process (FIG. 55) itself is not executed in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), even if the CB state is started in the middle of the AT state ST5, The number of games played is not treated as the number of games played in AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the AT state ST5 is shifted to the CB state in the middle of the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the shift to the CB state after the end of the CB state.

When the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S3101: YES), the value of the AT continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S3102). After that, it is determined whether or not the current condition is the add-on period by determining whether or not the value of the add-on period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3103).

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S3103: NO), it is determined whether or not the add-on win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3104). At the start of the game this time, if the transition lottery process for the addition period (step S3004) results in winning during the transition to the addition period, the addition winning flag is set to "1".

When "1" is set to the add-on win flag (step S3104: YES), the add-on period setting process is executed (step S3105). In the additional period setting process, the additional period counter of the main RAM 74 is set to a value corresponding to 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games during the additional period. After that, after clearing the addition winning flag to "0" (step S3106), a command to start the addition period is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3107). The add-on period start command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the add-on period has started. When the production side MPU 92 receives the start command of the additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the production indicating that the additional period has started and the additional period. make it

If the value of the additional period counter is 1 or more and it is the additional period (step S3103: YES), the value of the additional period counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3108). Then, when the value of the additional period counter after the subtraction becomes "0" (step S3109: YES), an additional period end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3110). The add-on period end command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the add-on period has ended. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the end command of the additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the performance indicating that the additional period has ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S3104, when the process of step S3107 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S3109, or when the process of step S3110 is executed, the value of the AT continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0". ” (step S3111). If the value of the AT continuation counter is "0" (step S3111: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74. (step S3112).

If "1" is not set to both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S3112: NO), the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3113). Thereafter, lottery processing for the number of unlocked games is executed (step S3114). The number of unlocked games is, as already explained, the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs in the transition lottery process (step S2112) in the case where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not won. This is a counter for identification by the MPU 72 . In the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, first, the lottery table for the number of unlocked games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 . Then, the number of unlocked games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table of the number of unlocked games. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of unlocked games. In addition, the selection probabilities for each number of unlocked games are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a large number of games is set high, or the probability of selecting the number of unlocked games with a small number of games is set high. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which After executing the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, the number of unlocked games selected in the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is set in the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S3115). The unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for specifying the number of remaining unlocked games in the main MPU 72 .

After that, an AT end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3116). The AT end command is a command for making the effect side MPU 92 recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display are performed so that the performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after the performance indicating that the AT state ST5 is completed. Control device 63 .

If "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag (step S3112: YES), the process of setting the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S3117). In the setting process, the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST6 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3118). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6.

As already described in the end preparation state ST6, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1902 in the second control process (FIG. 38) of the game section and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1903: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", the process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the second control process of the game section in the current game ( FIG. 38) ends. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1903: YES), the process for ending the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S1914 to S1916). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the AT state ST5 has ended ends.

After that, an AT end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3119). The AT end command is a command for making the effect side MPU 92 recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display are performed so that the performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after the performance indicating that the AT state ST5 is completed. Control device 63 .

<Regarding the execution control of the production in the AT state ST5>
Next, the contents of the performance execution control in the AT state ST5 will be described. FIG. 56(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various table groups 101 to 104 provided in the production-side ROM 93. FIG.

In the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63, a base effect corresponding to the current game situation is basically executed. When an additional performance execution opportunity occurs in a situation where the base performance is being executed, the additional performance corresponding to the execution opportunity is added to the base performance.

As the base performance, the base performance for the AT state ST5 executed in a game situation which is the AT state ST5 and is not the additional period and the ending period, and the additional performance which is executed in the game situation which is the AT state ST5 and is the additional period. A base effect for the period and a base effect for the ending period which is executed in the AT state ST5 and the ending period are set. In the base effect on the image display device 63, the character corresponding to the game situation is displayed in front of the background image of the type corresponding to each game situation, and the display mode of these background images and characters corresponds to the game situation. A moving image display that changes according to a series of stories is performed.

The additional effects include effects corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), effects executed to notify the number of games to be added when the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is increased, When the loop lottery is started in the additional period, the effect is executed to notify that the loop lottery has started, and when the loop lottery is finished in the additional period, the end of the loop lottery is notified. The production that is executed for the purpose is set. When an additional performance occurs in a situation where the base performance is being executed, the upper lamp 61 interrupts the light emission pattern corresponding to the base performance to execute the light emission pattern corresponding to the additional performance, and the speaker 62 corresponds to the base performance. A sound output corresponding to the additional effect is superimposed on the sound output to be performed, and the image display device 63 displays an image corresponding to the additional effect in front of a part of the image corresponding to the base effect.

In the effect-side ROM 93, as various table groups 101 to 104, an AT data table group 101, an additional period data table group 102, an ending data table group 103, and a game data table group 104 are stored in advance. ing. The AT data table group 101 includes a plurality of types of AT data tables. That is, a plurality of types of base effects are set for the AT state ST5, and the type of AT data table to be referred to when the AT state ST5 is started is determined, and the determined type of AT data table is determined. The base effect for the AT state ST5 corresponding to is executed.

FIG. 57(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base effect for the AT state ST5. As shown in FIG. 57(a), in the base effect for the AT state ST5, a seaside scenery and a moving image of the first base image G51 with the first base character image are displayed. A moving image display of the image G52 is performed. Image data for moving image display of the first base image G51 and the first effect image G52 is set in the AT data table.

In the base effect for the AT state ST5, if it is not the ending period, a remaining game number display image G53 for notifying the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is displayed. The number of games corresponding to the value of the effect side comprehension counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 is displayed in the remaining game number display image G53. The production side comprehension counter is a counter for the production side MPU 92 to comprehend the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5. Image data for displaying an image other than the image of the number portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 in the remaining game number display image G53 is set in the AT data table. By executing the display control of the image display device 63 using the image data, an image other than the image of the number portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is displayed in the number-of-remaining-games display image G53. be. Image data corresponding to the value of the effect-side comprehension counter of the effect-side RAM 94 is read from the effect-side ROM 93 for the image of the number portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 in the remaining game number display image G53. It is displayed on the image display device 63 by being used. Note that the remaining game number display image G53 is not displayed during the ending period.

In the base effect for the AT state ST5, a winning number display image G54 is displayed for reporting the number of game media the player has won in the AT state ST5. The winning number display image G54 displays the number of game media corresponding to the value of the winning number grasping counter provided in the effect side RAM94. The obtained number grasping counter is a counter for grasping the number of game media obtained by the player in the AT state ST5 in the effect side MPU 92. In the AT state ST5, a new game not based on establishment of a replay prize is started. In this case, the number of game media used to start the game based on the command received from the main MPU 72 is decremented from the acquired number grasping counter, and when the game media are given to the player in the AT state ST5, Based on the command received from the main side MPU 72, the number of game media is added to the acquired number grasping counter. Image data for displaying an image other than the numerical image corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the AT state ST5 in the acquired number display image G54 is set in the AT data table. By executing the display control of the image display device 63 using the image data, images other than the image of the number portion corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the acquired number display image G54 are displayed. Image data corresponding to the value of the winning number grasping counter of the performance-side RAM 94 is read from the performance-side ROM 93 and used for the image of the number portion corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the winning number display image G54. By doing so, it is displayed on the image display device 63 .

The add-on period data table group 102 includes a plurality of types of add-on period data tables. In other words, multiple types of base effect for the additional period are set, and when the additional period starts, the type of the additional period data table to be referenced is determined, and the determined type of additional period data table The base effect for the additional period corresponding to is executed.

FIG. 57(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the base effect for the additional period. As shown in FIG. 57(b), in the base effect for the additional period, a moving image of the second base image G61 with the background of the same color and the second base character image is displayed. A moving image display of G62 is performed. Image data for moving image display of the second base image G61 and the second effect image G62 are set in the data table for the additional period.

In the base effect for the additional period, a remaining game number display image G63 for notifying the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is displayed. The number of games corresponding to the value of the effect side comprehension counter of the effect side RAM 94 is displayed in the remaining game number display image G63. Image data for displaying an image other than the image of the number portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 in the remaining game number display image G63 is set in the additional period data table. By executing the display control of the image display device 63 using the image data, an image other than the image of the number portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is displayed in the number-of-remaining-games display image G63. be. Image data corresponding to the value of the effect-side comprehension counter of the effect-side RAM 94 is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 for the image of the number portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 in the remaining game number display image G63. It is displayed on the image display device 63 by being used.

In the base effect for the add-on period, an acquired number display image G64 for notifying the number of game media acquired by the player is displayed in the AT state ST5. The winning number display image G64 displays the number of game media corresponding to the value of the winning number grasping counter of the effect side RAM94. Image data for displaying an image other than the number image corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the AT state ST5 in the acquired number display image G64 is set in the add-on period data table. By executing the display control of the image display device 63 using the image data, images other than the image of the number portion corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the acquired number display image G64 are displayed. Image data corresponding to the value of the winning number grasping counter of the performance-side RAM 94 is read from the performance-side ROM 93 and used for the image of the number portion corresponding to the number of game media acquired by the player in the winning number display image G64. By doing so, it is displayed on the image display device 63 .

In the base effect for the add-on period, an add-on period game number display image G65 for notifying the remaining number of continuous games during the add-on period is displayed. In the additional period game number display image G65, the number of games corresponding to the value of the additional period grasping counter of the effect side RAM 94 is displayed. The add-on period grasping counter is a counter for grasping the number of continuous games remaining in the add-on period by the production side MPU 92. When the add-on period starts, the add-on period is calculated based on the command received from the main side MPU 72. A value corresponding to 10 games, which is the number of initial continuous games, is added to the addition period grasping counter, and is received from the main MPU 72 every time a game in which the number of bets is "3" in the non-CB state is executed during the addition period. Based on the command issued, the value of the additional period grasping counter is decremented by one. Image data for displaying images other than the image of the number portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the additional period in the additional period game number display image G65 is set in the additional period data table. By executing the display control of the image display device 63 using the image data, an image other than the image of the number portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games in the additional period is displayed in the additional period game number display image G65. be. Image data corresponding to the value of the add-on period grasp counter of the effect-side RAM 94 is read from the effect-side ROM 93 for the image of the number portion corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games during the add-on period in the add-on period game number display image G65. It is displayed on the image display device 63 by being used.

The ending data table group 103 includes a plurality of types of ending data tables. In other words, multiple types of base effects for the ending period are set, and when the ending period starts, the type of the ending data table to be referenced is determined, and the base effect for the determined type of ending period is determined. will be executed. The game data table group 104 includes multiple types of game data tables. In other words, a plurality of types of additional effects are set, and when an additional effect execution opportunity occurs, a game data table corresponding to the execution opportunity is selected, and the selected type of additional effect is executed. becomes.

FIG. 56(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various areas 111 to 113 of the performance side RAM 94 for reading out the data table.

A first control area 111 , a second control area 112 and a third control area 113 are provided in the effect-side RAM 94 . In the first control area 111, the AT data table to be referred to among the AT data table group 101 in the AT state ST5 is read. In the second control area 112, if the period is an addition period, the data table for the addition period that is the reference target from the data table group 102 for the addition period is read. The referenced ending data table is read. In the third control area 113, the game data table to be referred to among the game data table group 104 is read.

When the add-on period comes, the data table for add-on period is read to the second control area 112 while the data table for AT is read to the first control area 111 . In the ending period, the ending data table is read to the second control area 112 while the AT data table is being read to the first control area 111 . The second control area 112 is set to have a higher priority for reference than the first control area 111 . Therefore, in the add-on period, the execution control of the base effect is performed according to the add-on period data table read to the second control area 112, and the base effect is performed according to the AT data table read to the first control area 111. execution control is not performed. When the add-on period ends and the add-on period data table is erased from the second control area 112, the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 is restored in the same manner as before the add-on period starts. Execution control of the base effect is executed accordingly. Also, during the ending period, the execution control of the base effect is performed according to the ending data table read out to the second control area 112, and the base effect is executed according to the AT data table read out to the first control area 111. No execution control.

The third control area 113 is set as an additional area with respect to the first control area 111 and the second control area 112 . In a game situation in which the AT state ST5 is neither the addition period nor the ending period, the base effect according to the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 is read out to the third control area 113. Effects are added according to the game data table provided. When it is the additional period, the base effect according to the data table for the additional period read out to the second control area 112 is performed, and the effect according to the game data table read out to the third control area 113 is performed. Added. When it is the ending period, an effect according to the game data table read out to the third control area 113 is added to the base effect according to the ending data table read out to the second control area 112.例文帳に追加be done.

In addition to the various table groups 101 to 104, the performance side ROM 93 stores a plurality of normal data tables that are referred to for executing and controlling the base performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1. A group of pseudo-bonus data tables in which a plurality of types of pseudo-bonus data tables referred to for executing and controlling the base performance corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are stored in advance. In the case of the normal game state ST1, the normal data table selected as a reference object from the normal data table group is read out to the first control area 111, and in the case of the pseudo bonus state ST4, the pseudo bonus data table. A pseudo-bonus data table selected as a reference target from the group is read to the first control area 111 . Further, even in the normal game state ST1 and the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when an opportunity to execute an additional effect occurs, the game data table corresponding to the current execution opportunity among the game data table group 104 is the third control. The additional effect read out to the area 113 and corresponding to the game data table is added to the base effect.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the data configuration of the AT data table. Although the specific data contents are different, the basic data structure is the same for the additional period data table, the ending data table, and the game data table.

In the AT data table, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set so as to have serial numbers. A combination of sound data, which is data for outputting sound from the upper lamp 61, and light emission data, which is data for causing the upper lamp 61 to emit light, is set. When the data table for AT becomes a reference target, the performance execution control is performed based on the combination of the image data, the sound data and the light emission data set in association with the pointer information of the first order. After that, every time the performance update timing comes, the pointer information to be referred to is updated to become the pointer information in the next order, and the image data set corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to after the update. , the execution control of the effect is performed based on the combination of the sound data and the light emission data. Execution control of the effect is finally performed based on the combination of the image data, the sound data and the light emission data set in association with the pointer information of the last order.

In the case of the AT data table, the AT state ST5 still continues when the performance execution control is performed based on the combination of the image data, the sound data and the light emission data set in association with the pointer information of the last order. If so, the pointer information to be referenced returns to the pointer information in the first order. As a result, when the game state continues in the AT state ST5 and neither the addition period nor the ending period, a series of effects set in the AT data table is repeated. This is the same for the additional period data table and the game data table.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the effect control process for AT executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The effect control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

If the AT shift command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3201: YES), the AT data table selection process is executed (step S3202). In the selection process, an AT data table to be referred to in the AT state ST5 of this time is determined by lottery among a plurality of types of AT data tables included in the AT data table group 101 of the effect-side ROM 93 . At the time of this lottery, a reference object determination table stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of the plurality of types of AT data tables are the same.

After that, the AT data table of the type selected in step S3202 is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference target, and stored in the first control area 111 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3203). In this case, after the first control area 111 is cleared to “0”, the AT data table of the type read this time is stored in the first control area 111 . By storing the data table for AT in the first control area 111, the execution control of the performance is performed according to the data table for AT, and the base performance of the AT state ST5 is executed.

After that, information corresponding to 50 games, which is the number of initial continuous games in the AT state ST5, is set in the effect side comprehension counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3204). The production side comprehension counter is a counter for the production side MPU 92 to comprehend the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5. In the AT state ST5, the number of games corresponding to the information stored in the performance side comprehension counter is displayed on the image display device 63 as the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5. Incidentally, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the AT state ST5, the value of the production side grasping counter is decremented by 1, and accordingly the remaining AT state ST5 displayed on the image display device 63 is The number of continuous games is also decremented by one.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201 or if the process of step S3204 is executed, if it is not the additional period (step S3205: NO), the condition is that the command to start the additional period has been received from the main MPU 72. (step S3206: YES), the selection process of the data table for the additional period is executed (step S3207). In the selection process, a data table for an add-on period to be referred to in the current add-on period is determined by lottery among a plurality of types of add-on period data tables included in the add-on period data table group 102 of the performance-side ROM 93 . At the time of this lottery, a reference object determination table stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of the multiple types of data tables for additional periods are the same.

Thereafter, the type of addition period data table selected in step S3207 is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference target, and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3208). In this case, after the second control area 112 is cleared to “0”, the data table for the addition period of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112 . By storing the data table for the add-on period in the second control area 112, the performance execution control is performed according to the data table for the add-on period, and the base effect for the add-on period is executed.

If it is the add-on period (step S3205: YES), on condition that the end command of the add-on period is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3209: YES), the second control area 112 of the production side RAM 94 is set to "0". Clear (step S3210). By clearing the second control area 112 to "0", the performance execution control according to the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 is resumed, and the base performance of the AT state ST5 is executed. . After that, the addition period end flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3211). The add-on period end flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the situation after the add-on period has ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S3206, when the process of step S3208 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S3209, or when the process of step S3211 is executed, the main MPU 72 outputs the first to third addition commands. is received (step S3212). As already explained, the first addition command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that an addition to the number of games has occurred at the time of transition to the addition period, and the second addition command is a first addition lottery, as already explained. It is a command for causing the effect side MPU 92 to recognize that the additional winning was won in the processing (step S3009) and the number of additional games selected in the first additional lottery processing (step S3009), and the third addition command is This is a command for causing the effect-side MPU 92 to recognize the number of additional games selected in the second addition lottery process (step S3019).

If any one of the first to third addition commands has been received (step S3212: YES), game data table selection processing is executed (step S3213). In the selection process, a game data table of a type corresponding to the type of addition command and the number of additional games received this time is selected from among a plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect-side ROM 93. . Then, the game data table of the selected type is read from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference object, and stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3214). In this case, after the third control area 113 is cleared to “0”, the game data table of the type read this time is stored in the third control area 113 . By storing the game data table in the third control area 113, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the game data table. An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of games included in the received addition command (that is, the number of additional games that occurred this time) has been added.

After that, the information corresponding to the number of additional games set in the addition command received this time is added to the effect-side comprehension counter of the effect-side RAM 94 . As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 displayed on the image display device 63 is increased by the number of additional games set in the addition command received this time.

If a negative determination is made in step S3212 or if the processing of step S3215 is executed, loop addition effect processing is executed in step S3216, irregular processing is executed in step S3217, and ending processing is executed in step S3218. is executed, and other processing is executed in step S3219. The processing of steps S3216 to S3218 will be described later. In other processing of step S3219, execution control of effects other than the various effects described above in AT state ST5 is performed.

FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing task processing executed by the MPU 92 on the production side. The task processing is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 6 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

If any type of data table is stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3301: YES), pointer update processing for the third control area 113 is executed (step S3302). In the pointer update process for the third control area 113, a process for updating the pointer information to be referred to in the data table read to the third control area 113 is executed. Specifically, immediately after the game data table is stored in the third control area 113, the first pointer information in the game data table is set as the pointer information to be referred to. Further, after the performance execution control is started according to the game data table stored in the third control area 113, the pointer information in the next order should be newly referred to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as pointer information.

After that, it is determined whether or not a trigger for ending the reference target of the data table stored in the third control area 113 has occurred (step S3303). Specifically, when the data table stored in the third control area 113 is a data table other than the progress/stopped data table described later, the pointer information to be referred to is the game stored in the third control area 113. It is determined whether or not the pointer information of the last order in the data table has been exceeded. If the pointer information to be referred to exceeds the pointer information of the last order in the game data table stored in the third control area 113 (step S3303: YES), the third control area 113 of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "0". ' is cleared (step S3304). As a result, the performance execution control according to the game data table that has been stored in the third control area 113 until then ends.

Note that when the data table stored in the third control area 113 is a progress/stopped data table to be described later, the pointer information to be referred to is the last table in the progress/stopped data table stored in the third control area 113 . Even if the pointer information of the order is exceeded, the progress/stopped data table is not erased from the third control area 113 and is stored and held in the third control area 113 . In this case, the pointer information to be referred to is updated to the pointer information in the first order. When the progress/suspension data table is stored in the third control area 113, the process of step S3709 is executed in the irregular processing (FIG. 67) described later so that the progress/suspension data table is stored in the third control area. Area 113 is erased.

When a negative determination is made in step S3301, when a negative determination is made in step S3303, or when the process of step S3304 is executed, any type of data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94. (step S3305). In the second control area 112, as already explained, the addition period data table included in the addition period data table group 102 of the effect side ROM 93 or the ending data table included in the ending data table group 103 of the effect side ROM 93 are read. be

If any type of data table is stored in the second control area 112 (step S3305: YES), pointer update processing for the second control area 112 is executed (step S3306). In the pointer update processing of the second control area 112, although the details will be described later, processing for updating the pointer information to be referred to in the data table read to the second control area 112 is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3305, or when the process of step S3306 is executed, it is determined whether or not the update standby flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3307). The update standby flag indicates that the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 of the production side RAM 94 during the addition period or ending period in the AT state ST5 is the last order in the AT data table. This is a flag for the effecting side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the pointer information of the first order has been set again by reaching the pointer information of the first order.

If the update standby flag is not set to "1" (step S3307: NO), pointer update processing for the first control area 111 is executed (step S3308). In the pointer update process for the first control area 111, a process for updating the pointer information to be referenced in the data table read to the first control area 111 is executed. Specifically, when the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, immediately after the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, the first order in the AT data table is set as the pointer information to be referred to. Further, after the performance execution control is started according to the AT data table stored in the first control area 111, the pointer information in the next order should be newly referred to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as pointer information.

After that, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the first control area 111 exceeds the pointer information in the last order in the data table (step S3309). When the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table exceeds the last-order pointer information in the AT data table. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S3309, the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the first control area 111 is set to the pointer information of the first order in the data table (step S3310). When the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is set to the first pointer information in the AT data table.

After that, it is determined whether or not any data table is stored in the second control area 112 (step S3311). Specifically, for the AT state ST5, it is determined whether or not the second control area 112 stores an additional period data table or an ending data table. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3311, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 of the production side RAM 94 during the addition period or ending period in the AT state ST5 is the AT data. It means that the pointer information in the first order is set again by reaching the pointer information in the last order in the table. In this case, "1" is set to the update standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3312).

When "1" is set to the update standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3307: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the addition period end flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3313). . As already explained, the add-on period end flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to grasp the situation after the add-on period has ended. "1" is set to the period end flag.

If the addition period end flag is set to "1" (step S3313: YES), the update standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3314), and the addition period end flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to " 0” is cleared (step S3315). By clearing the update wait flag to "0", the state of waiting for the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 is cancelled. In the ending period, the update standby flag of the effect-side RAM 94 may be set to "1". , the update standby flag is cleared to "0" when the ending period ends, that is, when the AT state ST5 ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S3309, when a negative determination is made in step S3311, when the process of step S3312 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S3313, or when the process of step S3315 is executed, It is determined whether or not any data table is stored in the 2 control area 112 (step S3316). Specifically, for the AT state ST5, it is determined whether or not the second control area 112 stores an additional period data table or an ending data table.

If a negative determination is made in step S3316, data setting processing from the first control area 111 is executed (step S3317). In the data setting process from the first control area 111, in the data table stored in the first control area 111, image data, sound data, and light emission data set in correspondence with the current pointer information to be referred to are set. read out. Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. When the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, the image data, sound data, and light emission data set in the AT data table corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are read. . Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the base effect of the AT state ST5 corresponding to various data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. will be

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3316, data setting processing from the second control area 112 is executed (step S3318). In the data setting process from the second control area 112, in the data table stored in the second control area 112, the image data, sound data, and light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are set. read out. Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. When the second control area 112 stores the data table for the additional period, the image data, the audio data, and the light emission data set in the data table for the additional period corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to read out. Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the base effects for the additional period corresponding to the various data set in the data table for the additional period corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are displayed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. will be executed. In addition, when the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, the image data, sound data and light emission data set in the ending data table corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to read out. Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the base effect of the ending period corresponding to the various data set in the ending data table corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. will be

When the process of step S3317 is executed, or when the process of step S3318 is executed, it is determined whether or not any game data table is stored in the third control area 113 (step S3319). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3319, data setting processing from the third control area 113 is executed (step S3320). In the data setting process from the third control area 113, in the data table stored in the third control area 113, the image data, sound data, and light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are set. read out. Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed so that the image corresponding to the read image data is added to the image of the base effect corresponding to the data table of the first control area 111 or the second control area 112, and the read image data is read. Executes sound output control of the speaker 62 so that the sound output corresponding to the sound data is superimposed on the sound output of the base effect corresponding to the data table in the first control area 111 or the second control area 112, and the read light emission Light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed so that the light emission pattern corresponding to the data is executed by interrupting the light emission pattern of the base effect.

Next, how the pointer information to be referenced in the data tables stored in the first control area 111 and the second control area 112 is updated in the AT state ST5 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 61(a) shows the situation of the AT state ST5, FIG. 61(b) shows the situation of the add-on period, and FIG. FIG. 61(d) shows a period during which the pointer information to be referenced in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated.

At the timing of t1, the AT state ST5 is started as shown in FIG. 61(a). At the timing of t1, the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111 of the effect side RAM 94, and updating of pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is started as shown in FIG. 61(c). At , the base effect for the AT state ST5 corresponding to the AT data table is started. After that, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is sequentially updated from timing t1 to timing t2 as shown in FIG. 61(c). As a result, the base effect for the AT state ST5 proceeds. Thereafter, at timing t2, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table becomes the pointer information of the last order as shown in FIG. The pointer information becomes the first pointer information in the AT data table. That is, when one round of the base effect for the AT state ST5 defined in the AT data table is completed, a new round of the base effect for the AT state ST5 is started. In this case, since the AT data table to be referred to in each round is the same, the content of the base effect for the AT state ST5 is also the same.

After that, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is sequentially updated from the timing t2 to the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 61(c), and the base effect for the AT state ST5 proceeds. Then, at the timing of t3, the add-on period starts as shown in FIG. 61(b). At the timing of t3, the addition period data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the production side RAM 94, and updating of the pointer information to be referred to in the addition period data table is started as shown in FIG. 61(d). By doing so, the base effect for the additional period corresponding to the data table for the additional period is started.

As already explained, when the data table for the addition period is stored in the second control area 112, even in a situation where the data table for AT is stored in the first control area 111, reference is made when performing the execution control of the base effect. The data table to be used is the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112, and the data table for AT stored in the first control area 111 is not referred to. However, the period until the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 reaches the pointer information of the last order and is updated to the pointer information of the first order is an additional period. Thus, even if the AT data table is not referenced, the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table is continuously updated. Therefore, the additional period starts at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 61(b), but even after the timing t3, as shown in FIG. Not only is the pointer information to be referred to in the added period data table updated, but also the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 as shown in FIG. 61(c). is updated.

After that, at the timing of t4, the add-on period ends as shown in FIG. 61(b). By clearing the second control area 112 to "0" at the timing t4, the additional period data table is no longer a reference target. Therefore, the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 at the start of the current AT state ST5 is again referred to, and the base effect for the AT state ST5 corresponding to the AT data table is resumed.

As already explained, even if it is the addition period and the AT data table in the first control area 111 is not a reference target, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is continuously updated. Therefore, when the addition period ends and the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted, the content of the base effect for the AT state ST5 that was being executed immediately before the start of the addition period is resumed. The base performance for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the contents at the time when the current addition period has progressed for the period during which the current addition period is executed with respect to the contents of the base performance for the AT state ST5 executed immediately before the start of the addition period. be. As a result, the base performance for the AT state ST5 can be resumed in a state in which the progress of the base performance for the AT state ST5 reflects the lapse of the period during which the additional period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect executed when the base effect for the AT state ST5 is resumed.

After that, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is sequentially updated from timing t4 to timing t5 as shown in FIG. 61(c). As a result, the base effect for the AT state ST5 proceeds. Thereafter, at timing t5, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table becomes the pointer information of the last order as shown in FIG. The pointer information becomes the first pointer information in the AT data table. That is, when one round of the base effect for the AT state ST5 defined in the AT data table is completed, a new round of the base effect for the AT state ST5 is started. In this case, since the AT data table to be referred to in each round is the same, the content of the base effect for the AT state ST5 is also the same.

After that, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is sequentially updated from timing t5 to timing t6 as shown in FIG. 61(c), and the base effect for AT state ST5 proceeds. Then, at the timing of t6, the add-on period starts as shown in FIG. 61(b). At the timing of t6, the addition period data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the production side RAM 94, and updating of the pointer information to be referred to in the addition period data table is started as shown in FIG. 61(d). By doing so, the base effect for the additional period corresponding to the data table for the additional period is started.

As already explained, when the data table for the add-on period is stored in the second control area 112, even in a situation where the data table for AT is stored in the first control area 111, it is referred to during the execution control of the base effect. The data table to be used is the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112, and the data table for AT stored in the first control area 111 is not referred to. However, the period until the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 reaches the pointer information of the last order and is updated to the pointer information of the first order is an additional period. Thus, even when the AT data table is not referenced, the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table is continuously updated. Therefore, the additional period starts at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 61(b), but even after the timing t6, as shown in FIG. Not only is the pointer information to be referred to in the added period data table updated, but also the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 as shown in FIG. 61(c). is updated.

Thereafter, at timing t7 in the middle of the addition period, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table becomes the pointer information of the last order as shown in FIG. 61(c), and further the pointer information to be referred to is updated. As a result, the pointer information to be referred to becomes the first pointer information in the AT data table. However, since the present condition is the addition period as shown in FIG. 61(b), the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table in the first control area 111 is not updated after the timing of t7. In other words, the period from when the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 reaches the pointer information of the last order and is updated to the pointer information of the first order is the add-on period. Even if the AT data table is not referenced in the AT data table, updating of the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table is continued. When the sequential pointer information is reached and updated to the first sequential pointer information, updating of the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is awaited while the additional period continues. As a result, it is possible to prevent continuous updating of the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table that is not to be referred to in a situation where the addition period continues.

After that, the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is sequentially updated from timing t7 to timing t8 as shown in FIG. The base performance will proceed. During the timing from t7 to t8, the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 is not updated as shown in FIG. 61(c).

After that, at the timing of t8, the add-on period ends as shown in FIG. 61(b). By clearing the second control area 112 to "0" at the timing t8, the additional period data table is no longer a reference target. Therefore, the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 at the start of the current AT state ST5 is again referred to, and the base effect for the AT state ST5 corresponding to the AT data table is resumed. In this case, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 at the timing t7 is the pointer information of the first order, and the update is stopped. The base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the effect contents corresponding to the pointer information of the first order in the AT data table. That is, the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the first effect contents. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the first effect contents when the additional period ends.

<Regarding loop lottery processing>
Next, the loop lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. The loop lottery process is executed by generating winning in the generation lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery during the additional period of the AT state ST5. As already explained, the loop lottery is to repeatedly execute the addition lottery process for determining whether or not to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 within the range of one game until the termination condition is satisfied. be. The loop lottery process is executed in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing loop lottery processing.

First, it is determined whether or not the loop lottery flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3401). As already explained, the loop lottery flag is set to "1" by winning in the generation lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery during the additional period of the AT state ST5. If the loop lottery flag is not set to "1" (step S3401: NO), the loop lottery process is terminated.

If the loop lottery flag is set to "1" (step S3401: YES), it is determined whether or not the loop lottery completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3402). . The completion flag of the loop lottery indicates to the main MPU 72 whether or not the addition lottery process (step S3411) triggered by the generation lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery is completed. This is a flag for specifying The value of the completion flag of the loop lottery is "0" at the timing of the occurrence winning in the loop lottery occurrence lottery process (step S3014), and the occurrence winning in the loop lottery occurrence lottery process (step S3014). If the execution of the addition lottery process (step S3411) triggered by becoming is completed, that is, if the addition lottery process (step S3411) does not become an addition winning or the addition lottery process (step S3411) When the number of times of execution reaches the end reference number, "1" is set to the completion flag of the loop lottery. If the loop lottery completion flag is set to "1" (step S3402: YES), there is no need to execute the addition lottery process (step S3411), so the process jumps to the loop addition process of step S3416.

If the loop lottery completion flag is not set to "1" (step S3402: NO), in steps S3403 to S3408, a process ( Before step S3410), a process for generating a specific waiting period is executed.

Acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 can be repeated in the loop lottery process (FIG. 62). The second random number is 1-byte numerical information consisting of 8 bits. The second random number circuit 76 sequentially updates the second random number within the numerical range of "0 to 255" based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and when the update of the second random number completes one round, a new initial value is generated. value to start the next round of updating the second random number. The loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated, and the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed for each execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62). is executed once. Since the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11) is started at a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, at least the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11) is executed after the second random number is obtained once and before the second random number is obtained next time. A waiting period equivalent to the activation cycle occurs. That is, since a predetermined waiting period is secured by the activation cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), there is no need to execute processing for securing the predetermined waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 62). . 1.49 milliseconds, which is the activation period of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), is longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once.

In the process (steps S3403 to S3408) for generating a specific waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 62), first, the number of repetitions "15" is set in the repetition number counter provided in the main RAM 74 ( step S3403). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 62), acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 can be repeated as already described. When the second random number is obtained repeatedly, the predetermined waiting period (timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 11 ) is ensured, and a specific standby period is ensured as a period of variation. Even if this specific waiting period reaches the maximum value, it is shorter than the predetermined waiting period, more specifically, shorter than the predetermined waiting period.

After that, the second random number obtained in the previous step S3410 is read out from the second random number obtaining area provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3404). Note that after the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the second random number acquisition area contains a second random number having a decimal value of "0". will be stored. Thereafter, the lower 4-bit numerical value of the 8-bit second random number read in step S3404 is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as the variation numerical value (step S3405). In this case, since the variation numerical value is 4-bit numerical information, the minimum value is "0" and the maximum value is "15".

After that, it is determined whether or not the variation value stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3406). If the variation numerical value is smaller than the repetition number counter value (step S3406: YES), the process proceeds to step S3407 by the JUMP instruction. ), the process proceeds to step S3407 by a NOP command. In step S3407, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. If the value of the repetition number counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S3408: NO), the process returns to step S3406, and if the value of the repetition number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3408 : YES), the process proceeds to step S3409.

As described above, the process proceeds to step S3407 regardless of whether the determination in step S3406 is affirmative or the determination in step S3406 is negative. is executed, the processing time required to proceed to the processing of step S3407 is longer by about 10 microseconds. Then, as described above, depending on whether the variation value determined as the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter, the JUMP instruction is executed and the NOP instruction is executed. There are cases where it is done. Further, the value of the repetition number counter is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S3407 is executed, and the processes of steps S3406 and S3407 are repeated until the value of the repetition number counter after the decrement of 1 becomes "0". As a result, the ratio of the number of times the JUMP instruction is executed in step S3406 and the number of times the NOP instruction is executed in step S3406 out of the 15 repetition times is calculated as the value of the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time. , and as a result, the specific waiting period can be varied.

In step S3409, 1 is added to the value of the lottery execution counter provided in the main side RAM74. The lottery execution counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3411) has been executed in the current game.

After that, the second random number at that time is obtained from the second random number circuit 76 and stored in the second random number obtaining area of the main RAM 74 (step S3410). After that, addition lottery processing is executed (step S3411). In the addition lottery process, an addition lottery table stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and a second random number is collated against the read addition lottery table, so that the second random number is set in the addition lottery table. It is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information. Only one addition lottery table is provided, and the winning numerical value information is set so that the probability of winning an addition lottery in the addition lottery process is 90%. Here, the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game does not affect the addition lottery process. ), the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game may affect the addition lottery process.

If addition lottery processing (step S3411) does not result in an addition lottery (step S3412: NO), after setting the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 to "1" (step S3415), Execute addition. Thereby, the loop lottery process in the current game ends. Note that the completion flag of the loop lottery is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

When addition lottery processing (step S3411) results in addition winning (step S3412: YES), the value of the loop addition counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S3413). The loop addition counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the addition lottery has been won in the addition lottery process (step S3411).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter of the main RAM 74 has reached the end reference number of "1000" (step S3414). The maximum number of games that can be added as the number of additional games in the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is 1000 games, and the maximum number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3411) is 1000 times. If the value of the lottery execution counter has reached "1000" (step S3414: YES), it means that the number of addition lottery processes (step S3411) executed in the current game has reached the maximum value of 1000 times. Therefore, after setting the completion flag of the loop lottery in the main RAM 74 to "1" (step S3415), the addition process for the loop in step S3416 is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the lottery execution counter has not reached "1000" (step S3414: YES), the loop addition process of step S3416 is executed without setting the loop lottery completion flag to "1".

FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the loop addition process executed in step S3416 of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62).

When the stop button 42 to 44 corresponding to one of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is operated and a stop command is generated (step S3501: YES), the value of the loop addition counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more. On the condition that there is (step S3502: YES), addition processing of the AT continuation counter is executed (step S3503). In the process of adding the AT continuation counter, the value of the loop addition counter is added to the value of the AT continuation counter. As already explained, the AT continuation counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining games to be continued in the AT state ST5 by the main side MPU 72. As already explained, the loop addition counter wins addition in the addition lottery process (step S3411). It is a counter for specifying the number of times that the main side MPU 72 has become. In other words, when the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is executed, the occurrence of the first stop command triggers the addition from the start of the current game until the first stop command is generated. The number of games corresponding to the number of winning additions in the lottery process (step S3411) is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5, and the previous stop is triggered by the occurrence of the second and subsequent stop commands. The number of games corresponding to the number of winning additions in the addition lottery process (step S3411) from the issuance of the command until the issuance of the current stop command is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5.

Thereafter, a loop addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3504). The loop addition command includes information corresponding to the value stored in the loop addition counter of the main RAM 74 . Although the details will be described later, when the effect side MPU 92 receives the loop addition command, the effect indicating that the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 has been added due to the execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is displayed at the top. The lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 are used. After that, the value of the loop addition counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3505).

When a negative determination is made in step S3502, or when the process of step S3505 is executed, it is determined whether or not the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3506). As already explained, the loop lottery completion flag indicates whether or not the addition lottery process (step S3411) triggered by the occurrence lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery has been completed. It is a flag for specifying in main side MPU72. The value of the completion flag of the loop lottery is "0" at the timing when the occurrence lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery is won, and the addition lottery process (step S3411) does not win the addition lottery. If the addition lottery process (step S3411) has been executed the number of times reaches the end reference number, the completion flag of the loop lottery is set to "1".

If the loop lottery completion flag is set to "1" (step S3506: YES), the loop lottery completion flag is cleared to "0" (step S3507). Also, the loop lottery flag is cleared to "0" (step S3508). After that, a loop lottery end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3509). Although details will be described later, when the effecting side MPU 92 receives a loop lottery end command, it indicates that the loop lottery executed with the occurrence winning in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) has ended. An effect is executed by an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62 and an image display device 63. - 特許庁

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the loop addition effect processing executed by the effect side MPU 92. FIG. The loop addition effect processing is executed in other processing (step S3219) in the effect control processing for AT (FIG. 59).

First, it is determined whether or not a loop lottery start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3601). As already explained, the loop lottery start command is a command that is transmitted when a winning lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery executed by the main MPU 72 during the additional period is won.

If a loop lottery start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3601: YES), a game data table selection process is executed (step S3602). In the selection process, the game data table of the type corresponding to the loop lottery start command received this time is selected from the plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect-side ROM 93 . Then, the game data table of the selected type is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference object, and stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3603). In this case, after the third control area 113 is cleared to “0”, the game data table of the type read this time is stored in the third control area 113 . By storing the game data table in the third control area 113, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the game data table, and the start of the loop lottery for the base effect for the additional period is indicated. and an additional effect indicating that 10 games have been added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5.

After that, the information corresponding to the 10 games added this time is added to the performance-side comprehension counter of the performance-side RAM 94 . As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 displayed on the image display device 63 is increased by "10".

If a negative determination is made in step S3601, it is determined whether or not a loop addition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3605). As already explained, the loop addition command is a command that is sent when a new stop command is issued to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while the loop lottery is being performed in the main MPU 72. . If the loop addition command is a command that is triggered by the occurrence of the first stop command in the current game, the first stop command after the start of the current game Information on the number of games corresponding to the number of times that addition winning is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) is included as information on the number of additional games until the command is issued. In addition, if the loop addition command is a command that is sent when the second or subsequent stop command is issued, the loop addition command will be sent after the previous stop command is issued. Information on the number of games corresponding to the number of times that addition winning is won in the addition lottery process (step S3411) is included as information on the number of additional games until the command is issued.

If a loop addition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3605: YES), a game data table selection process is executed (step S3606). In the selection process, the game data table of the type corresponding to the loop addition command received this time is selected from among the plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect-side ROM 93 . Then, the game data table of the selected type is read from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference object, and stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3607). In this case, after the third control area 113 is cleared to “0”, the game data table of the type read this time is stored in the third control area 113 . By storing the game data table in the third control area 113, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the game data table. An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of included games (that is, the number of additional games that have occurred this time) has been added.

After that, the information corresponding to the number of additional games set in the loop addition command received this time is added to the effect-side comprehension counter of the effect-side RAM 94 . As a result, the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 displayed on the image display device 63 is increased by the number of additional games set in the loop addition command received this time.

If a negative determination is made in step S3605, or if the process of step S3608 is executed, it is determined whether or not a loop lottery end command has been received from the main MPU 72. As already explained, the loop lottery end command is a command that is transmitted when the loop lottery that is executed in the main MPU 72 in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) is won, and that the loop lottery is completed. be.

If a loop lottery end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3609: YES), a stop instruction command indicating that a stop instruction has been issued to the last rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this game. is received from the main MPU 72, thereby determining whether or not it is time to end the current game (step S3610). Note that the configuration for determining whether or not it is time to end the current game is not limited to the one described above. , it may be determined whether or not it is time to end the current game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3610, game data table selection processing is executed (step S3611). In the selection process, the game data table of the type corresponding to the end of the loop lottery is selected from among the plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect-side ROM 93 . Then, the game data table of the selected type is read from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference object, and stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3612).

In the third control area 113, a game data table corresponding to the loop addition command transmitted when a stop command is issued to the last rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game is stored. If so, the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery is stored in the third control area 113 so as not to overwrite the game data table. In this case, the performance execution control is performed according to the game data table corresponding to the loop addition command transmitted when a stop command is issued to the last rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game. After that, performance execution control is performed according to the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery. Therefore, with respect to the base effect for the add-on period, it is included in the loop addition command transmitted when a stop command is generated for the last rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the current game. After adding the additional effect indicating that the number of games (that is, the number of additional games that have occurred this time) has been added, the additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has ended is added. On the other hand, in the third control area 113, there is a game data table corresponding to the loop addition command transmitted when a stop command is issued to the last spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the current game. If not stored, after clearing the third control area 113 to "0", the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery is stored in the third control area 113.例文帳に追加In this case, performance execution control is performed according to the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery, and an additional performance indicating the end of the loop lottery is added to the base performance for the additional period.

If the loop lottery end command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3609: YES), and if it is not the end timing of the game (step S3610: NO), the end waiting flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to " 1” is set (step S3613). The end standby flag indicates that the execution of the additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has ended is in a state of waiting until a stop command is generated for the last spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this game. is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 .

When a negative determination is made in step S3609, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the end standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3614). If the end standby flag is set to "1" (step S3614: YES), a stop instruction command indicating that a stop instruction has been issued to the last spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game is issued. By determining whether or not it is received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the current game (step S3615).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3615, game data table selection processing is executed (step S3616). In the selection process, a game data table of a type corresponding to the end of the loop lottery is selected from among a plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect-side ROM 93 . Then, the game data table of the selected type is read from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference object, and stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3617). In this case, after the third control area 113 is cleared to “0”, the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery is stored in the third control area 113 . As a result, performance execution control is performed according to the game data table corresponding to the end of the loop lottery, and an additional performance indicating the end of the loop lottery is added to the base performance for the additional period. After that, the completion standby flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3618).

Next, the manner in which the effect progresses when the loop lottery is executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 65(a) shows the execution period of the game in which the number of bets is "3", FIG. 65(b) shows the timing at which the loop lottery is generated and won in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014), FIG. 65(c) shows the period during which an additional effect indicating that the number of games has been added is being executed, and FIG. 65(d) shows the timing when a stop command is issued to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. FIG. 65(e) shows the timing at which the loop addition command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92, and FIG. Indicates a period.

First, the case where the loop lottery is continued even after the stop command is issued to the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be explained.

At the timing t1, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 65(a). The game is started in the add-on period of AT state ST5. Therefore, when the game is started, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the base effect for the additional period. In the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in the game, the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) is executed when one of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won, and as shown in FIG. It will be the generation winning of the loop lottery. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65(c), from the timing t1 to the timing t2, the additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has started and the 10 games are in the AT state ST5 with respect to the base effect for the additional period. An additional effect is added to indicate that it has been added to the remaining number of continuous games.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 65(d), when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one reel 32L, 32M, 32R are operated to stop. As a result, a stop command is generated for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Since the addition lottery process of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) repeatedly executed until the stop command is generated, the number of games corresponding to the number of times the addition lottery has been won is added. A loop addition command included as information on the number of games is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t3. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(c), over the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (that is, this time An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of additional games that have occurred has been added.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 65(d), the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one reel 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped while the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. A stop command is issued to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by being operated. The number of times that the addition lottery was won due to the addition lottery processing of the loop lottery processing (FIG. 62) repeatedly executed from the generation of the previous stop command to the generation of the current stop command. A loop addition command containing information on the number of games corresponding to . As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(c), over the period from timing t5 to timing t6, the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (that is, this time An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of additional games that have occurred has been added.

After that, at the timing t7, as shown in FIG. 65(d), one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated to stop. As a result, a stop command is issued to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The number of times that the addition lottery was won due to the addition lottery processing of the loop lottery processing (FIG. 62) repeatedly executed from the generation of the previous stop command to the generation of the current stop command. A loop addition command containing information on the number of games corresponding to . As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(c), over the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (that is, this time An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of additional games that have occurred has been added.

Also, since the stop command issued at the timing of t7 is the last stop command for the rotating reels 32L, 32M and 32R, the timing of t7 is the end timing of the current game as shown in FIG. A loop lottery end command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t7. Therefore, at the timing of t8, which is the timing when the additional effect indicating that the number of games included in the addition command for the loop received this time (that is, the number of additional games that occurred this time) is added, the base for the addition period is set. An additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has ended is added to the effect, as shown in FIG. 65(f). The additional effect ends at the timing of t9.

As already explained, the loop lottery process (Fig. 62) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (Fig. 11), which is started at a period of 1.49 milliseconds, is started. The maximum number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3411) is set to 1000 times when the loop lottery is executed when the loop lottery is won in the generation lottery process (step S3014). It is Therefore, the time required to complete the loop lottery that was started when the loop lottery was won in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) is assumed to be 1.5 seconds or less. Become. On the other hand, the shortest period required from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R until the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 becomes effective is 600 milliseconds. The shortest time required from the start of stop control by the generation of a stop command to 32R until the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for generating the next stop command becomes effective is also 500 milliseconds. Then, the time required from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the generation of a stop command for the last rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is 1.6 seconds or longer. Therefore, the loop lottery started in the current game is surely completed by the time a stop command is issued to the last spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Next, a case will be described in which the loop lottery end trigger occurs before the stop command is issued to the two reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

At the timing of t10, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 65(a). The game is started in the add-on period of AT state ST5. Therefore, when the game is started, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 perform the base effect for the additional period. In the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in the game, the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014) is executed when one of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won, and as shown in FIG. A loop lottery will be generated and won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65(c), from the timing of t10 to the timing of t11, the additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has started and the 10 games are in the AT state ST5 with respect to the base effect for the additional period. An additional effect is added to indicate that it has been added to the remaining number of continuous games.

After that, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 65(d), when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated to stop. As a result, a stop command is generated for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Since the additional lottery process of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) repeatedly executed until the stop command is generated, the number of games corresponding to the number of times the addition lottery has been won is added. A loop addition command included as information on the number of games is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t12. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(c), over the period from timing t12 to timing t13, the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (ie, this time An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of additional games that have occurred has been added.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 65(d), the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one reel 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped while the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. A stop command is issued to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by being operated. Since the additional lottery process of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) repeatedly executed from the generation of the previous stop command to the generation of the current stop command, the addition lottery process was won, so the addition lottery was won. A loop addition command containing information on the number of games corresponding to the number of times as information on the number of additional games is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t14. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65(c), over the period from timing t14 to timing t15, the number of games included in the loop addition command received this time (ie, this time An additional effect is added to indicate that the number of additional games that have occurred has been added.

In addition, the addition lottery process of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) in the predetermined plural number of times executed from the generation of the previous stop command to the generation of the current stop command has resulted in a loss. Therefore, the loop lottery end command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t14. However, since the stop command this time is not the last stop command, even if the loop lottery end command is received, the additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has ended will not be executed, and the end standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 will be set. "1" is set.

After that, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 65(d), one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated to stop. As a result, a stop command is issued to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the addition lottery process (step S3411) in the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) results in a loss by the time the last stop command is issued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65(e), the transmission of the loop addition command triggered by the occurrence of the current stop command is not performed.

Since the stop command issued at the timing of t16 is the last stop command for the rotating reels 32L, 32M and 32R, the timing of t16 is the end timing of the current game as shown in FIG. 65(a). Also, as already explained, at the timing of t14, "1" is set to the end standby flag of the effect side RAM 94. FIG. Therefore, at the timing of t16, an additional effect indicating that the loop lottery has ended is added to the base effect for the additional period, as shown in FIG. 65(f). The additional effect ends at the timing of t17.

As described above, the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated, and the addition lottery process (FIG. 62) is executed once. (Step S3411) is executed once. Since the timer interrupt process (Fig. 11) is started at a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, at least the timer interrupt process (Fig. 11) is executed after the second random number is obtained once and before the second random number is obtained next time. A waiting period equivalent to the activation cycle occurs. Then, at least 1.49 seconds are required until the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3411) reaches 1000, which is the end reference number. In this case, the reels 32L and 32M will continue until the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3411) reaches 1000 times, which is the end reference number, in the game in which the occurrence lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery is generated and won. , 32R waits for the start of the rotation, the time required to finish the start game is lengthened accordingly.

On the other hand, even if the occurrence lottery process of the loop lottery (step S3014) is won, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Even if there is, the result of the addition lottery process (step S3411) will be a wrong result, or the value of the lottery execution counter will reach "1000" which is the end reference number. The addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed each time the process (FIG. 62) is executed. Then, after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have started to rotate, the number of games awarded by winning the additional prize in the addition lottery process (step S3411) is appropriately added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5. be. As a result, a large number of games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 while preventing the waiting time for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R from becoming excessively long. becomes possible.

Triggered by the generation of a new stop command for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R, addition winning is performed in the addition lottery processing (step S3411) of the loop lottery processing (FIG. 62) until the stop command is generated. An additional effect is executed to indicate that the number of games corresponding to the number of times the number of games has been reached is added to the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5. As a result, the number of additional games notified at one time is reduced compared to the configuration in which the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is increased each time an addition win is made in the addition lottery process (step S3411). It is possible to do more. In addition, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of additional games is notified each time the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated to stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the matter.

Even if the event of ending the loop lottery due to not winning the addition lottery in the addition lottery process (step S3411) occurs before the stop command corresponding to the second stop is generated, the end of the loop lottery is detected. The shown effect is executed when a stop command is generated for the last spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, the player's expectation for the addition of the number of games due to the loop lottery is maintained until the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the last spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated to stop. It is possible to

<About irregular games>
Next, in the AT state ST5, as an irregular game, a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in the CB state (first CB state ST2 and second CB state ST3) is executed. will be explained.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in a CB state is executed as an irregular game during the AT state ST5 addition period. be. As already described, in the base effect for the additional period on the image display device 63, the moving image display of the second base image G61 is performed, and the moving image display of the second effect images G62 of a plurality of types is performed in front of the second base image G61. A remaining game number display image G63, an acquired number display image G64, and an additional period game number display image G65 are displayed. In this case, when a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in the CB state is executed as an irregular game during the addition period of the AT state ST5, the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped. Then, the image display device 63 displays an image for notifying that the vehicle is stopped. Specifically, the image display device 63 displays an image “Stopping progress!” A dark display state G72 is entered so that the area other than the displayed area (that is, the area where the image of the base effect for the additional period is displayed) is displayed darker than before. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped due to the occurrence of the irregular game.

A processing configuration for stopping the progress of the base effect for the additional period in response to the occurrence of the irregular game and executing the in-stop notification will be described below. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing irregular processing executed by the MPU 92 on the effect side. Irregular processing is executed in step S3217 in the effect control processing for AT (FIG. 59).

When the game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 during the additional period (steps S3701 and S3702: YES), it is determined whether or not the progress stop flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" ( step S3703). The stop progress flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped.

If the progress stop flag is not set to "1" (step S3703: NO), it is determined whether the game started this time is either a game with a bet number of "2" or a CB state game. Determine (step S3704). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is an irregular game.

If the current game is an irregular game (step S3704: YES), selection processing of the progress/stopped data table is executed (step S3705). In the selection process, the progress/stopped data table is selected from a plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect-side ROM 93 . Then, the selected progress/stopped data table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference target, and stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3706). In this case, after the third control area 113 is cleared to "0", the progress/stopped data table read this time is stored in the third control area 113 . By storing the progress/stopped data table in the third control area 113, the performance is controlled according to the progress/stopped data table. As a result, the image display device 63 displays an image "progress stop!" An area other than the area where the middle image G71 is displayed (that is, the area where the image of the base effect for the additional period is displayed) is put into a dark display state G72 so that it is displayed more dimly than before.

Since the audio data corresponding to the in-stop notification is set in the in-progress/stop data table, the sound corresponding to the in-stop notification is output from the speaker 62 . In addition, since the light emission data corresponding to the stop information is set in the progress stop data table, the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stop information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although image data for enabling display corresponding to the stop notification is set in the progress stop data table, at least one of the audio data and the light emission data is set. It is good also as the composition which is not set.

After that, "1" is set to the progress stop flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S3707). As a result, updating of the pointer information of the add-on period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is stopped, as will be described later in detail. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped. However, even when the progress of the base effect for the add-on period is stopped, the image of the base effect for the add-on period is displayed on the image display device 63 using the image data corresponding to the pointer information in the stopped state. is displayed. As described above, the image of the base effect for the additional period is displayed dimly based on the progress/stopped data table stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 . Image processing is performed to

If "1" is set in the progress stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3703: YES), the game started this time is either a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state. It is determined whether or not (step S3708). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is an irregular game. If the current game is an irregular game (step S3708: YES), the irregular processing ends without executing the processing of steps S3709 and S3710. As a result, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped, and the state in which the in-stop notification is being executed is maintained.

If the current game is not an irregular game (step S3708: NO), the third control area 113 is cleared to "0" (step S3709). This ends the execution of the in-stop notification. Also, the progress stop flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3710). As a result, the update of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is canceled, as will be described later in detail. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the add-on period is restarted. In this case, the base effect for the additional period is restarted from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing of the second control area 112 executed by the effect side MPU 92. FIG. The pointer update process for the second control area 112 is executed at step S3306 in the task process (FIG. 60).

If "1" is set in the progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3801: YES), the pointer update process of the second control area 112 is terminated without executing the process after step S3802. Therefore, when the progress stop flag is set to "1", the pointer information in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is not updated.

If "1" is not set in the progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3801: NO), processing for updating the pointer information to be referred to in the data table read out to the second control area 112. (step S3802). Specifically, when the add-on period data table is stored in the second control area 112, immediately after the add-on period data table is stored in the second control area 112, in the add-on period data table The pointer information in the first order is set as the pointer information to be referenced. Further, after the performance execution control is started in accordance with the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the next order is newly referred to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as power pointer information. Further, when the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, immediately after the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, pointer information of the first order in the ending data table is set as the pointer information to be referenced. Further, after the performance execution control is started according to the ending data table stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the next order should be newly referred to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as pointer information.

After that, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the second control area 112 has exceeded the last pointer information in the data table (step S3803). When the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table exceeds the last pointer information in the additional period data table judge. In addition, when the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table exceeds the last pointer information in the ending data table. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3803, the pointer information to be referenced in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is set to the pointer information of the first order in the data table (step S3804). When the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table is set to the first pointer information in the additional period data table. When the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table is set to the first pointer information in the ending data table.

Next, how the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped by the execution of the irregular game will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 69(a) shows the execution period of the game, FIG. 69(b) shows the situation of the extra period, and FIG. FIG. 69(d) shows the period during which the pointer information can be updated, FIG. 69(d) shows the period during which the irregular game (the game where the number of bets is "2" and the game in CB state) is executed, and FIG. 69(e) indicates the period during which the in-stop notification is performed.

At the timing t1, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 69(a). In the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the game, when one of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won, the addition period transition lottery process (step S3004) is executed, and the addition period transition lottery is won. Therefore, at the timing t2, which is the end timing of the current game, the additional period starts as shown in FIG. 69(b). In addition, when the start command of the additional period is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 , the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 . Then, at timing t2, the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table can be updated as shown in FIG. 69(c).

After that, a new game is executed at timings t3 to t4 as shown in FIG. 69(a). Since this game is not an irregular game like the game from the timing t1 to the timing t2, the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is added as the additional period progresses. Further, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the pointer information to be referred to in the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112 is updated, so that the base effect for the additional period progresses. Become.

After that, a new game is executed at timings t5 to t6 as shown in FIG. 69(a). Since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2", it is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 69(d). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 69(c), updating of the pointer information to be referred to in the data table for additional period stored in the second control area 112 is stopped. As a result, the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped at the timing of t5 to the timing of t6. This state in which the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped continues until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state game with a bet number of "3" is started. Therefore, even after the irregular game is finished, the state in which the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped is maintained at least until the next game is started.

In addition, during the period from timing t5 to timing t6, as shown in FIG. 69(e), the in-stop notification is executed. As a result, the image display device 63 enters a dark display state G72 in which the image corresponding to the base effect for the additional period whose progress is stopped at the timing t5 is displayed more dimly than before, and progress is stopped. An image G71 is additionally displayed. In addition, the speaker 62 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop notification, and the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stop notification. This state in which the in-stop notification is executed continues until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state game with a bet number of "3" is started. Therefore, even after the irregular game is over, the state in which the in-stop notification is executed is maintained at least until the next game is started.

Thereafter, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 69(a) from timing t7 to timing t8. The game is not an irregular game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 at the timing t7, which is the start timing of the current game, is the previous update. is resumed from the pointer information at the timing at which it was stopped. As a result, at the timing of t7, the progress of the base effect for the addition period is restarted from the effect content that was stopped last time. At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 69(e), the in-stop notification is terminated.

Thereafter, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 69(a) from timing t9 to timing t10. Since the game is not an irregular game, the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is increased as the additional period progresses. Further, as shown in FIG. 69(c), the pointer information to be referred to in the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112 is updated, so that the base effect for the additional period progresses. Become.

After that, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 69(a) from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12. Since the CB winning has been established in the game immediately before the game, the game is a game in the CB state, and is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 69(d). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 69(c), updating of the pointer information to be referred to in the data table for additional period stored in the second control area 112 is stopped. As a result, at the timing of t11, the state in which the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped is started. Further, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 69(e), the in-stop notification is started. As a result, the image display device 63 enters a dark display state G72 in which the image corresponding to the base effect for the additional period, which is in a state where the progress is stopped at the timing of t11, is displayed more dimly than before, and the progress is stopped. An image G71 is additionally displayed. In addition, the speaker 62 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop notification, and the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stop notification.

After that, a plurality of games are executed in the CB state including timings t13 to t14 and t15 to t16. Therefore, over the period from timing t11 to timing t17, as shown in FIG. , the in-stop notification is executed as shown in FIG. 69(e).

The CB state ends at timing t16. Then, from timing t17 to timing t18, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the first game after the CB state ends is executed. The game is not an irregular game. Therefore, at the timing of t17, which is the start timing of the current game, as shown in FIG. is resumed from the pointer information at the timing at which it was stopped. As a result, at the timing of t17, the progress of the base effect for the addition period is restarted from the effect content that was stopped last time. At the timing of t17, the in-stop notification is terminated as shown in FIG. 69(e).

As described above, when the irregular game is executed in the additional period, not only the progress of the additional period is stopped, but also the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped. As a result, it is possible to make the progress of the base effect for the additional period correspond to the degree of progress of the additional period.

When the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped, the in-stop notification is executed. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the progress of the additional period is stopped due to the execution of the irregular game.

When the in-stop notification is being executed, the image display device 63 is brought into a state in which the player can recognize the image of the base effect for the additional period at the timing when the progress is stopped. As a result, when the execution of the irregular game is terminated and the base effect for the additional period is restarted, the progress of the image is restarted from the image content of the base effect for the additional period immediately before the progress is stopped. It becomes possible to make the player recognize it clearly.

Next, the processing configuration executed by the effect-side MPU 92 during the ending period of the AT state ST5 will be described.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the ending process executed by the MPU 92 on the effect side. The ending process is executed in step S3218 in the effect control process for AT (FIG. 59).

First, it is determined whether or not the first ending command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3901). As already explained, the first ending command is the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74. This command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 when the number of games exceeds the upper limit. If the first ending command has been received (step S3901: YES), the effect-side first ending flag provided in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3902). The effect-side first ending flag is a flag for determining whether or not the effect-side MPU 92 has received the first ending command from the main-side MPU 72 .

When a negative determination is made in step S3901, or when the process of step S3902 is executed, it is determined whether or not the second ending command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3903). As already explained, the second ending command acquires the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter multiplied by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5. This command is sent from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 when the result of addition to the value of the number counter 74d is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number. If the second ending command has been received (step S3903: YES), the effect-side second ending flag provided in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3904). The effect-side second ending flag is a flag for determining whether or not the effect-side MPU 92 has received the second ending command from the main-side MPU 72 .

When a negative determination is made in step S3903, or when the process of step S3904 is executed, it is determined whether or not any type of ending data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94. Then, it is determined whether or not the base effect for the ending period is being executed (step S3905). If a negative determination is made in step S3905, "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S3906: YES), and the current game state is the AT state. If it is ST5 (step S3907: YES), the ending data table selection process is executed (step S3908).

In the selection process, the ending data table to be referred to during the current ending period is determined from among the plurality of types of ending data tables included in the ending data table group 103 of the effect-side ROM 93 . In this case, if the first ending flag on the production side is set to "1", the first ending command that triggered the setting of the first ending flag on the production side to "1" is included in the command. The ending data table corresponding to the information on the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is determined as a reference. In this way, the ending data table corresponding to the information on the number of games required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is determined as a reference, so that the content of the progress of the base effect for the ending period can be determined. It is possible to make the content correspond to the number of remaining games until the ending condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, if the second ending flag on the production side is set to "1", the second ending command that triggered the setting of the second ending flag on the production side to "1" was included in the second ending command. The ending data table corresponding to the information of the restricted total net increase number of game media required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is determined as a reference target. In this way, the ending data table corresponding to the information on the total net increase in the number of game media with restrictions required until the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is determined as a reference target. It is possible to set the content of progress of the base presentation to the content corresponding to the number of remaining games until the ending condition is satisfied.

In addition, when the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table is the pointer information corresponding to the execution of the effect corresponding to the final game, but the game is actually before the game in which the ending condition is satisfied. , an effect for waiting until the final game is interrupted until the game in which the ending condition is satisfied is executed, and when the ending condition is satisfied in the game, an effect corresponding to the final game is executed. Further, if the ending condition is satisfied in the game even though the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table has not reached the pointer information corresponding to the execution of the effect corresponding to the final game, The pointer information is adjusted to pointer information corresponding to execution of the effect corresponding to the final game.

After that, the ending data table of the type selected in step S3908 is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference object, and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3909). In this case, after the second control area 112 is cleared to “0”, the ending data table of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112 . By storing the ending data table in the second control area 112, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the ending data table, and the base effect for the ending period is executed.

If the base effect for the ending period is being executed (step S3905: YES), on condition that the game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3910: YES), the first ending flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3911). If the first ending flag is not set to "1" (step S3911: NO), the current ending period is the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter. It means that it is started when the result of adding the value of the result of accumulating the acquisition expected value of the game media in step 2 to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number. In this case, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3912).

If the progress stop flag is not set to "1" (step S3912: NO), it is checked whether the game started this time is either a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state. Determine (step S3913). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is an irregular game.

If the current game is an irregular game (step S3913: YES), selection processing of the progress/stopped data table is executed (step S3914). In the selection process, the progress/stopped data table is selected from a plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect-side ROM 93 . Then, the selected progress/stopped data table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference target, and stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3915). In this case, after the third control area 113 is cleared to "0", the progress/stopped data table read this time is stored in the third control area 113 . By storing the progress/stopped data table in the third control area 113, the performance is controlled according to the progress/stopped data table. As a result, on the image display device 63, an image "progress is stopped!" An area other than the area where the intermediate image G71 is displayed (that is, the area where the image of the base effect for the ending period is displayed) is put into a dark display state G72 so that it is displayed more dimly than before.

Since the audio data corresponding to the in-stop notification is set in the in-progress/stop data table, the sound corresponding to the in-stop notification is output from the speaker 62 . In addition, since the light emission data corresponding to the stop information is set in the progress stop data table, the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stop information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although image data for enabling display corresponding to the stop notification is set in the progress stop data table, at least one of the audio data and the light emission data is set. It is good also as the composition which is not set.

After that, "1" is set to the progress stop flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S3916). As a result, updating of the pointer information of the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is stopped. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped. However, even when the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped, the image of the base effect for the ending period is displayed on the image display device 63 using the image data corresponding to the pointer information in the stopped state. is displayed in As described above, the image of the base effect for the ending period is displayed dimly based on the progress/stopped data table stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94, and becomes a dark display state G72. Image processing is performed to

If "1" is set in the progress stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3912: YES), the game started this time is either a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state. It is determined whether or not (step S3917). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is an irregular game. If the current game is an irregular game (step S3917: YES), the irregular processing ends without executing the processing of steps S3918 and S3919. As a result, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped, and the state in which the in-stop notification is being executed is maintained.

If the current game is not an irregular game (step S3917: NO), the third control area 113 is cleared to "0" (step S3918). This ends the execution of the in-stop notification. Also, the progress stop flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3919). As a result, the state in which updating of the pointer information of the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is stopped is released. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is restarted. In this case, the base effect for the ending period is resumed from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

With the above configuration, the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter is multiplied by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5. In the ending period started when the result of adding to the value of is equal to or more than the upper limit net increase number, if the irregular game is executed, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped and stopped Medium notification is executed.

As already explained, not only the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the non-CB state, but also the game in which the number of bets is "2" or the game in the CB state is executed, the total winning number counter 74d update is performed. In this case, as already explained in the game where the number of bets is "2" and the game in the CB state, the expected net increase in game media in one game ("Expected number of game media given in one game" to "1 game The value obtained by subtracting the number of game media betted in ) becomes less than 1. Then, the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter is multiplied by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5, and the resulting value is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. In the ending period started when the result is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number, the more irregular games are executed, the more games are required until the ending conditions are satisfied. Under such circumstances, the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter is multiplied by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5. In the ending period that started when the result added to the number became the upper limit net increase number or more, when the irregular game is executed, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped and the stop notification is executed, the content of the base presentation for the ending period can be set to the content of presentation corresponding to the number of remaining games until the ending condition is satisfied.

On the other hand, when the first ending flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3911: YES), the processing for stopping the progress of the base effect for the ending period with respect to the execution of the irregular game is executed. don't run Further, when "1" is set to the first ending flag and "1" is set to the progress stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3911: YES, step S3920: YES), the third control Area 113 is cleared to "0" (step S3918). This ends the execution of the in-stop notification. Also, the progress stop flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3919). As a result, the state in which updating of the pointer information of the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is stopped is released. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is restarted. In this case, the base effect for the ending period is restarted from the content of the effect at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

With the above configuration, the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games. In the ending period started with the occurrence of the event, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is not stopped even if the irregular game is executed.

As already explained, not only the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the non-CB state, but also the game in which the number of bets is "2" or the game in the CB state is executed. The game number counter 74c is updated. Then, when the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games. In the ending period started as , the number of games required until the ending condition is satisfied does not change even if the irregular game is executed. Under these circumstances, the sum of the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c of the main-side RAM 74, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main-side RAM 74, and the value of the AT-continuation counter of the main-side RAM 74 becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games. In the ending period started with this as a trigger, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is not stopped even if the irregular game is executed.

Next, how the progress of the base effect for the ending period is not stopped by the execution of the irregular game and how it is stopped will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 71(a) shows the execution period of the game, FIG. 71(b) shows the period during which the first ending flag on the effect side is set to "1", and FIG. 71(c) shows the second ending flag on the effect side. FIG. 71(d) shows a period during which the ending flag is set to "1", and FIG. 71(e) shows the period during which the irregular game (the game with the number of bets of "2" and the game in CB state) is being executed, and FIG. 71(f) shows the period during which the in-stop notification is being executed. .

The sum of the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c of the main-side RAM 74, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main-side RAM 74, and the value of the AT-continuation counter of the main-side RAM 74 is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of games of the second section SC2. A case where the ending period starts at .

A new game is executed in the AT state ST5 as shown in FIG. 71(a) from timing t1 to timing t2. By executing the game, the sum of the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 reaches the second interval. It becomes more than the upper limit number of games of SC2. Therefore, when the first ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect MPU 92, the effect side first ending flag is set to "1" at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 71(b). Also, since the first ending flag on the effect side is set to "1" in the AT state ST5, the ending period data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the RAM 94 on the effect side. Then, at timing t2, the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table can be updated as shown in FIG. 71(d).

After that, in the ending period, a plurality of games are executed as shown in FIG. 71(a) including timings t3 to t4, t5 to t6, and t7 to t8. In this case, the irregular game is executed from timing t5 to timing t6 as shown in FIG. 71(e). and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, regardless of whether or not the irregular game is executed. , the pointer information to be referenced in the ending period data table is sequentially updated as shown in FIG. 71(d).

After that, the ending condition of the second section SC2 is established at the timing of t8. Therefore, the AT state ST5 ends with the forced end of the second section SC2. Also, since the ending period ends, the second control area 112 is cleared to "0".

Next, the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter is multiplied by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5, and the resulting value is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. A case will be described in which the ending period is started when the result is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2.

A new game is executed in the AT state ST5 as shown in FIG. 71(a) from timing t9 to timing t10. By executing the game, the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter is multiplied by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 to obtain the total acquisition number. The result of addition to the value of the counter 74d is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the second ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect MPU 92, the effect side second ending flag is set to "1" at the timing t10 as shown in FIG. 71(c). Also, since the second ending flag on the effect side is set to "1" in the AT state ST5, the ending period data table is stored in the second control area 112 of the RAM 94 on the effect side. At the timing of t10, the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table can be updated as shown in FIG. 71(d).

After that, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 71(a) from timing t11 to timing t12 in the ending period. Since the game is not an irregular game, the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table is updated as shown in FIG. 71(d).

Thereafter, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 71(a) at timings t13 to t14. Since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2", it is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 71(e). Therefore, "1" is set to the progress stop flag of the production side RAM 94, and the pointer to be referred to in the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 as shown in FIG. 71(d). Information updates are stopped. As a result, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14. This state in which the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped continues until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state game with a bet number of "3" is started. Therefore, even after the irregular game is finished, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is kept stopped at least until the next game is started.

Further, during the period from timing t13 to timing t14, as shown in FIG. 71(f), the in-stop notification is executed. As a result, the image display device 63 enters a dark display state G72 in which the image corresponding to the base effect for the ending period, which is in a state where the progress is stopped at the timing of t13, is displayed more dimly than before, and the progress is stopped. An image G71 is additionally displayed. In addition, the speaker 62 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop notification, and the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stop notification. This state in which the in-stop notification is executed continues until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state game in which the number of bets is "3" is started. Therefore, even after the game of the irregular game is finished, the state in which the in-stop notification is executed is maintained at least until the next game is started.

After that, a new game is executed at timings t15 to t16 as shown in FIG. 71(a). The game is not an irregular game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71(d), the update of the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 at the timing of t15, which is the start timing of the current game, is the previous update. is resumed from the pointer information at the timing at which it was stopped. As a result, at the timing of t15, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is resumed from the content of the previously stopped effect. At the timing of t15, the in-stop notification is terminated as shown in FIG. 71(f).

After that, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 71(a) from timing t17 to timing t18. Since the CB winning has been established in the game immediately before the game, the game is a game in the CB state, and is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 71(e). Therefore, "1" is set to the progress stop flag of the production side RAM 94, and the pointer to be referred to in the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 as shown in FIG. 71(d). Information updates are stopped. As a result, at the timing of t17, the state in which the progress of the base effect for the addition period is stopped is started. Further, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 71(f), the in-stop notification is started. As a result, the image display device 63 enters a dark display state G72 in which the image corresponding to the base effect for the ending period, which is in a state where the progress is stopped at the timing of t17, is displayed more dimly than before, and the progress is stopped. An image G71 is additionally displayed. In addition, the speaker 62 outputs a sound corresponding to the stop notification, and the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stop notification.

After that, a plurality of games are executed in the CB state including timing t19 to timing t20 and timing t21 to t22. In other words, each game from timing t19 to timing t20 and from timing t21 to timing t22 is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 71(e). In this case, until timing t21, updating of the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table stored in the second control area 112 is stopped as shown in FIG. As shown in f), in-stop notification is performed.

However, at the timing of t20, the sum of the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 reaches the second section SC2. More than the maximum number of games. Therefore, when the first ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the effect MPU 92, the effect side first ending flag is set to "1" at the timing t20 as shown in FIG. 71(b).

At timing t21, the game is started with the first ending flag on the effect side set to "1". Therefore, the progress stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0", and even if the irregular game is being executed, it is stored in the second control area 112 as shown in FIG. 71(d). Updating of the pointer information to be referred to in the ending period data table is restarted. At the timing of t21, the in-stop notification is terminated as shown in FIG. 71(f).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) that continues over a plurality of games can occur, there is more variety of effects compared to the configuration in which only one-time effects are executed in units of one game. It is possible to achieve In this case, a game or CB state in which the number of bets is "2" as an irregular game (that is, a non-target game) in a situation during which the base effect for the addition period (or the base effect for the ending period) is executed When a game (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) occurs, the progress of the base effect for the addition period (or the base effect for the ending period) is stopped. As a result, the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) can be prevented even when an irregular game game occurs in which it is not preferable to proceed with the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period). production) can be prevented from progressing. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period).

If an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is being executed, the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) Not only is progress stopped, but a stop notification is performed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the base effect for the addition period (or the base effect for the ending period) is not continued due to the occurrence of the irregular game.

If an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is being executed, the base effect for the additional period at that time (or the base effect for the ending period) Effect) continues to be displayed on the image display device 63 . In other words, an image corresponding to the timing at which the irregular game occurs is displayed on the image display device 63 as the notice during stoppage. This makes it possible to associate the execution content of the in-stop notification with the progress content of the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the in-stop notification is executed. In addition, the player feels uncomfortable with the execution of the stop notification instead of the situation where the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is not continued due to the occurrence of the irregular game. It becomes possible to make it difficult to give

Data for displaying a progress stop image G71 for the data for displaying a still image at the timing when the irregular game game occurs in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period), and By applying the data for the dark display state G72, the data for displaying the still image is processed, and the processed data is used to display the stop notification image. As a result, a still image at the timing when the irregular game game occurs in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is displayed in a dark display state G72 as the image for notifying that the game is stopped, and progress is made. A stopped image G71 is displayed. In other words, since it is not the still image itself at the timing when the irregular game game occurs in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period), the player is informed that the image for notifying that the game is stopped is displayed. make it easier to recognize

Even if the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is not continued due to the occurrence of an irregular game in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) After that, when a game in which the target game is in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "3" occurs, the base effect for the addition period (or the base effect for the ending period) is resumed. As a result, even if an irregular game occurs in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period), the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) will not occur. It is possible to prevent this from occurring, and it is possible to secure an opportunity for the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) to occur.

In particular, an irregular game occurred in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period), so the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) was not continued. However, if the target game occurs after that, the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) will be changed from the content of the previous stop timing to the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period). production) resumes. As a result, even if an irregular game occurs in the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period), if the target game occurs after that, the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) It is possible to allow the player to confirm the content of the continuation of the base performance for use).

When a game in which the number of bets is "3" occurs in the non-CB state, the base effect for the addition period (or the base effect for the ending period) is continued, whereas the number of bets is increased in the non-CB state. When the game of "2" occurs, the base effect for the addition period (or the base effect for the ending period) is not continued. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which the number of bets is "2" has occurred. In particular, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is more advantageous for the player than a game in which the number of bets is "2". In this case, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that a game with a relatively disadvantageous bet number of "2" has occurred.

In the game in which the bet number is "3" in the non-CB state, the base effect for the addition period (or the base effect for the ending period) is continued, whereas in the case of the CB state, the bet number is "3", the base effect for the addition period (or the base effect for the ending period) is not continued. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in the CB state has occurred.

The content of the effect when an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the ending period is being executed is that the base effect for the ending period is set to "1" in the first ending flag on the effect side. There is a difference between the case where the base effect for the ending period is executed when the second ending flag on the effect side is set to "1". there is As a result, it is possible to make the content of the effect when an irregular game occurs correspond to the type of ending period that occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the base effect for the ending period.

Even if an irregular game occurs in the middle of the base effect for the ending period, which is executed when the first ending flag on the effect side is set to "1", the base effect for the ending period is not executed. If an irregular game occurs in the middle of the base effect for the ending period which is continued and is executed when the second ending flag on the effect side is set to "1", it is for the ending period. The base performance of is not continued. As a result, depending on the type of ending period that has occurred, the situation where the base effect for the ending period is continued when the irregular game game occurs, and when the irregular game game occurs It is possible to create a situation in which the base performance is not continuously executed.

The base effect for the ending period is canceled due to the occurrence of an irregular game in the middle of the base effect for the ending period, which is executed when the second ending flag on the effect side is set to "1". Even if the continuation is prohibited, if the first ending flag on the production side is set to "1", even in the situation where the irregular game is occurring, the ending period can be changed. The base performance continues. As a result, the first ending flag on the effect side is set to "1" even in the middle of the base effect for the ending period which is executed when the second ending flag on the effect side is set to "1". is set, the base for the ending period, which is executed when the first ending flag on the production side is set to "1", is treated when an irregular game occurs. It is possible to do the same as in the production.

Start when the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games. (i.e., the ending period started when the first ending flag on the production side is set to "1"), even if the irregular game game is executed, the ending period The progress of the base production is not stopped. Not only the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the non-CB state, but also the game in which the number of bets is "2" or the game in the CB state is executed. update is performed. Then, when the sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games. In the ending period started as , the number of games required until the ending condition is satisfied does not change even if the irregular game is executed. Under these circumstances, the sum of the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c of the main-side RAM 74, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main-side RAM 74, and the value of the AT-continuation counter of the main-side RAM 74 becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games. In the ending period started with this as a trigger, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is not stopped even if the irregular game is executed.

On the other hand, the value obtained by multiplying the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. In the ending period that started when the result was equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number, if an irregular game game is executed, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped and a stop notification is given. executed. The update of the total winning number counter 74d is executed not only in the non-CB state game where the bet number is "3" but also when the bet number is "2" or the game in the CB state is executed. be done. In this case, in the game where the number of bets is "2" and the game in the CB state, the expected net increase in game media in one game ("expected number of game media to be given in one game" The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media") becomes less than one. Then, the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter is multiplied by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5, and the resulting value is added to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. In the ending period started when the result is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number, the more irregular games are executed, the more games are required until the ending conditions are satisfied. Under such circumstances, the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter is multiplied by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5. In the ending period that started when the result added to the number became the upper limit net increase or more, if the game of the irregular game is executed, the progress of the base effect for the ending period is stopped and stopped By adopting the configuration in which the middle notification is executed, it is possible to change the content of the base presentation for the ending period to the content of presentation corresponding to the number of remaining games until the ending condition is satisfied.

A first control area 111 and a second control area 112 are provided in the effect-side RAM 94 as storage areas from which data tables are read. This makes it possible to create situations where multiple data tables are being read at the same time. Further, when the AT data table is read to the first control area 111 and the addition period data table is read to the second control area 112, the addition period data table read to the second control area 112 is While the performance is controlled according to the period data table, the performance is not controlled according to the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 . As a result, the second control area 112 can be set as a storage area to be prioritized over the first control area 111 as a storage area to be executed for performance execution control, and a plurality of data tables can be read out simultaneously. It is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the side to be prioritized as the execution target of performance execution control in the configuration that allows the situation to be generated.

In this case, the AT data table read out in the first control area 111 is controlled by the performance execution control according to the additional period data table read out in the second control area 112. Even in a situation where the performance execution control according to is not performed, updating of the pointer information to be referred to in the data table for AT is continued. Therefore, when the addition period ends and the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted, the content of the base effect for the AT state ST5 that was being executed immediately before the start of the addition period is resumed. The base performance for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the contents at the time when the current addition period has progressed with respect to the contents of the base performance for the AT state ST5 executed immediately before the start of the additional period. be. As a result, the base performance for the AT state ST5 can be restarted in a state in which the progress of the base performance for the AT state ST5 reflects the lapse of the period during which the additional period is executed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the contents of the effect executed when the base effect for the AT state ST5 is resumed.

The effect according to the AT data table read out in the first control area 111 is controlled by the execution control of the effect according to the data table for the addition period read out in the second control area 112. Although the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table continues to be updated even in the situation where the execution control of is not performed, if the pointer information to be referenced becomes the pointer information in the last order, A new round of updating the pointer information to be referenced is not started. As a result, the AT data table read out in the first control area 111 is changed in a situation where the performance execution control according to the additional period data table read out in the second control area 112 continues for a long time. It is possible to prevent the pointer information to be referenced from being continuously updated.

The update cycle of the pointer information to be referenced in the AT data table of the first control area 111 at the timing when the data table for the addition period is read to the second control area 112 is the data table for the addition period of the second control area 112. If the execution control of the effect according to is terminated in the middle, if the data table for the additional period is not read out to the second control area 112 after that, from the pointer information of the first order, At the same time as the updating of pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table in the first control area 111 is started, an effect corresponding to the first-order pointer information is started. That is, the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the first effect content. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted from the first effect contents when the additional period ends.

In the game that is won in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014), the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is performed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started until the lottery end opportunity occurs. The addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed once, and when the addition lottery process (step S3411) wins, the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is incremented by one. As a result, the player expects to win the occurrence lottery in the loop lottery occurrence lottery process (step S3014). It will be expected. In addition, when the information opportunity occurs even in the situation where the lottery end opportunity has not occurred in the game in which the above-mentioned occurrence winning has occurred, the addition lottery process executed until the information opportunity occurs (step S3411) The number of games given based on the result of is notified. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of notifying that the number of games has been awarded in the above-mentioned game in which the game has been generated and won, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Triggered by the generation of a new stop command for the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R, addition winning is performed in the addition lottery processing (step S3411) of the loop lottery processing (FIG. 62) until the stop command is generated. An additional effect is executed to indicate that the number of games corresponding to the number of times the number of games has been reached is added to the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5. As a result, the number of additional games notified at one time is reduced compared to the configuration in which the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is increased each time an addition win is made in the addition lottery process (step S3411). It is possible to do more. In addition, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of additional games is notified each time the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated to stop, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the matter.

When the first notification opportunity occurs in the game in which the occurrence winning is made, it is given based on the result of the addition lottery process (step S3411) executed from the start of the game until the first notification opportunity occurs. When the number of games is notified and the second or subsequent notification opportunity occurs in the game in which the above-mentioned occurrence winning occurs, the addition lottery processing executed from the previous occurrence of the notification opportunity to the current occurrence of the notification opportunity (step S3411 ), the number of awarded games is announced. This makes it possible to prevent the number of games notified at each notification opportunity from overlapping with the number of games notified at another notification opportunity.

In the event that a winning lottery is generated in the generation lottery process of the loop lottery (step S3014), 10 games are awarded at the start of the relevant game, and the fact that the 10 games have been awarded is notified. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of the occurrence of the above-mentioned occurrence-winning game, and to increase the player's attention to the above-mentioned occurrence-winning game.

Even if the event of ending the loop lottery due to not winning the addition lottery in the addition lottery process (step S3411) occurs before the stop command corresponding to the second stop is generated, the end of the loop lottery is detected. The shown effect is executed when a stop command is generated for the last spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, the player's expectation for the addition of the number of games due to the loop lottery is maintained until the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the last spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated to stop. It is possible to

The situation in which the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started ends within the range of the game that is generated and won in the loop lottery generation lottery process (step S3014). do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 from excessively increasing.

In the case where the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) results in a loss, if the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L, the main line ML is displayed with " When a combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R. A combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols can be stopped and displayed on the sub line SL1. In addition, when the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L. A combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols can be stopped and displayed on the main line ML, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R. In this case, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on the sub-line SL1. Therefore, in the final game of the transition standby period, if the lottery process (FIG. 16) is lost or if the index value IV=16 is won, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is used to perform the transition. It is possible to notify whether the type of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 to be executed is a big bonus or a regular bonus.

As a result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the type thereof to be notified using the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the index value IV=16. Winning and losing results are set. This makes it possible to increase the chances of displaying the stop results of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponding to the shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

If the index value IV=16 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the final game of the transition waiting period, the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be "Red 7" suggesting a big bonus. " symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed, and "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol suggesting that it is a regular bonus BAR symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a normal replay prize is won and a replay privilege is awarded. As a result, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above without affecting the profits given to the player.

In the final game of the transition waiting period, when the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is lost or the index value IV=16 is won and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, A display corresponding to the notified stop order is performed on the combined display unit 66 . As a result, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63 whose display is controlled by the production side MPU 92, the shared display section 66 whose display is controlled by the main side MPU 72 corresponds to it. It is possible to make the display to be performed.

In the final game of the transition standby period, if the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is a loss, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left reel 32L. A stop result indicating a big bonus is displayed, and a stop result indicating a regular bonus is displayed if the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the order of the middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R. . On the other hand, in the final game of the transition waiting period, if the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is won with the index value IV=16, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is middle reel 32M→right reel 32R→left. If the reel 32L, a stop result indicating a regular bonus is displayed, and if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the middle reel 32M→left reel 32L→right reel 32R, a stop indicating a big bonus is displayed. Results are displayed. In other words, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for displaying the stop result indicating the big bonus and the regular bonus in the case of the outlier result and in the case of winning with the index value IV=16. The relation of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for displaying the stopping result indicating is reversed. Thus, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is reported in the final game of the transition waiting period, the reported stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be either the big bonus or the regular bonus. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether the corresponding stop result is displayed.

Even in the situation where it is decided to shift to the big bonus, if the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the role in the final game of the transition standby period is a winning or losing result with an index value IV=16, " A combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is stop-displayed, and the reel performance is thereafter executed to execute the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol. A combination of symbols may be stopped and displayed. As a result, even if the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is informed that the reel effect suggesting the shift to the big bonus will occur afterwards. It is possible to expect.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the manner in which the effect is executed when the irregular game is executed during the additional period of the AT state ST5. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 72(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various table groups 101 to 104, 121 provided in the production-side ROM 93 of this embodiment.

In the effect-side ROM 93, various table groups 101 to 104, 121 are stored as in the first embodiment, as in the first embodiment. A table group 104 is stored in advance, and an irregular data table group 121 is also stored in advance. The irregular data table group 121 includes multiple types of irregular data tables. In the irregular data table, data are set for controlling the execution of an irregular performance which is executed instead of the base performance for the additional period when an irregular game occurs during the additional period. The irregular data table is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the additional period data table. The same number of pointer information as the corresponding type of additional period data table is set in the plurality of types of irregular data tables.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a predetermined type of irregular data table. In the irregular data table, the pointer information of "0" to "k" is set to the first data table, and the pointer information of "k+1" to "m" is set to the second data table. , a third data table is set for the pointer information of "m+1" to "n", a fourth data table is set for the pointer information of "n+1" to "p", and "p+1" to " The pointer information of "q" is set to the fifth data table. In other words, in the irregular data table, the serial numbered pointer information is divided into a plurality of groups that do not overlap each other. Different data tables are set corresponding to

The first type of irregular performance is executed by controlling the execution of the performance according to the first data table. FIG. 74(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first type of irregular effect. As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the first type of during-irregular effect, a moving image display of a first irregular image G81 with a scenery of the town and a first irregular-time character image is performed. Image data for moving image display of the first irregular image G81 is set in the first data table. Further, in the first data table, sound data for outputting a sound corresponding to the first type of irregular performance from the speaker 62 and light emission corresponding to the first type of irregular performance to the upper lamp 61 are stored. Light emission data is set so that it can be performed. A plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers in the first data table, and a combination of the image data, the sound data, and the light emission data is set in association with each piece of pointer information.

The second type of irregular performance is executed by controlling the execution of the performance according to the second data table. FIG. 74(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second type of irregular effect. As shown in FIG. 74(b), in the second type of during-irregular effect, a moving image display of a second irregular image G82 by a large number of second irregular-in-character images is performed. The content of the second irregular image G82 is different from the content of the first irregular image G81. Image data for moving image display of the second irregular image G82 is set in the second data table. Further, in the second data table, the sound data for outputting the sound corresponding to the second type of irregular performance from the speaker 62 and the light emission corresponding to the second type of irregular performance to the upper lamp 61 are stored. Light emission data is set so that it can be performed. The content of sound corresponding to the second type of irregular production is different from the content of sound corresponding to the first type of irregular production, and the content of light emission corresponding to the second type of irregular production. is different from the content of light emission corresponding to the first type of irregular production. A plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers in the second data table, and a combination of the image data, the sound data, and the light emission data is set in association with each piece of pointer information.

A third type of irregular performance is executed by controlling the performance execution according to the third data table, and a fourth type of irregular performance is executed by performing performance execution control according to the fourth data table. Then, the fifth type of irregular performance is executed by controlling the execution of the performance according to the fifth data table. In these third to fifth types of irregular effects, the image display device 63 displays a moving image of the corresponding irregular image, and the speaker 62 emits a sound corresponding to each type of irregular effect. is output, and the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to each type of irregular effect. A plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers in each of the third to fifth data tables. A combination of sound data for output and light emission data for light emission is set.

FIG. 72(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various areas 111 to 113, 122 provided in the effect side RAM 94 of this embodiment.

The production side RAM 94 is provided with a first control area 111, a second control area 112 and a third control area 113 as various areas 111 to 113 and 122 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. A control area 122 is provided. In the AT state ST5, the AT data table is read into the first control area 111 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the second control area 112, the data table for the addition period is read in the addition period, and the data table for the ending period is read in the ending period, as in the first embodiment. A game data table is read into the third control area 113 in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

In the fourth control area 122, the irregular data table to be referred to among the irregular data table group 121 is read when an irregular game occurs during the additional period of the AT state ST5. The fourth control area 122 is set to have a higher priority for reference than the second control area 112 . Therefore, when an irregular game occurs in the additional period, execution control of the effect during the irregular is performed according to the irregular data table read out to the fourth control area 122, and read out to the second control area 112. Execution control of the base effect according to the data table for the additional period is not performed. When the irregular game ends and the game with the number of bets "3" is started in the non-CB state, the irregular game is started by erasing the irregular data table from the fourth control area 122. Execution control of the base effect for the add-on period according to the data table for the add-on period read out to the second control area 112 is executed in the same manner as before.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the irregular processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 92 on the effect side. Irregular processing is executed in step S3217 in the effect control processing for AT (FIG. 59).

When the game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 during the additional period (step S4001 and step S4002: YES), it is determined whether or not the progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4003). . As in the first embodiment, the stop progress flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped.

If the progress stop flag is not set to "1" (step S4003: NO), it is determined whether the game started this time is either a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state. Determine (step S4004). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is an irregular game.

If the current game is an irregular game (step S4004: YES), an irregular data table selection process is executed (step S4005). In the selection process, among the plurality of types of irregular data tables included in the irregular data table group 121 of the effect-side ROM 93, the type of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is selected. Select the type of irregular data table. Also, the current pointer information to be referred to in the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112 is grasped (step S4006). Then, from among the first to fifth data tables in the irregular data table selected at step S4005, the data table set corresponding to the pointer information grasped at step S4006 is selected (step S4007). The selected data table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference object, and stored in the fourth control area 122 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4008). In this case, after the fourth control area 122 is cleared to “0”, the data table read this time is stored in the fourth control area 122 . By storing the data table in the fourth control area 122, the performance is controlled according to the data table. As a result, instead of the base effect for the additional period, the effect during irregular corresponding to the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is executed. In this case, the effect during irregularity is executed in each of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 as already described.

After that, "1" is set to the progress stop flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S4009). As a result, updating of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is stopped in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped. In addition, as already explained, the effect during the irregular period according to the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is more than the base effect for the additional period according to the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112. are also executed with priority, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 are in a state where the base effect for the additional period is not executed.

If "1" is set in the progress stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4003: YES), the game started this time is either a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state. It is determined whether or not (step S4010). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is an irregular game. If the current game is an irregular game (step S4010: YES), the irregular processing ends without executing the processing of steps S4011 and S4012. As a result, the state in which the irregular production is executed instead of the base production for the additional period is maintained.

If the current game is not an irregular game (step S4010: NO), the fourth control area 122 is cleared to "0" (step S4011). As a result, the execution of the effect during the irregular period is terminated. Also, the progress stop flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4012). As a result, the state in which updating of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is stopped is cancelled. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the add-on period is restarted. In this case, the base effect for the additional period is restarted from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing task processing in this embodiment executed by the MPU 92 on the production side. The task processing is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 6 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

In step S4101, the same processing as steps S3301 to S3315 of the task processing (FIG. 60) in the first embodiment is executed. By executing this processing, the pointer information to be referred to in the data tables stored in the first to third control areas 111 to 113 is updated. It should be noted that, when the progress stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1", the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated in the same manner as in the first embodiment. is stopped.

In the task processing (FIG. 76), if any type of data table is stored in the fourth control area 122 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4102: YES), pointer update processing of the fourth control area 122 is executed. (Step S4103). In the pointer update process for the fourth control area 122, a process for updating the pointer information to be referenced in the data table read to the fourth control area 122 is executed. Specifically, immediately after the data table is stored in the fourth control area 122, the first pointer information in the data table is set as the pointer information to be referred to. Further, after the performance execution control is started in accordance with the data table stored in the fourth control area 122, the pointer information in the next order is added to the current pointer information to be referred to as new pointer information to be referred to. set as

After that, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 has exceeded the last pointer information in the data table (step S4104). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4104, the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is set to the pointer information of the first order in the data table (step S4105). As a result, a new round of the series of effects during the irregular period determined by the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is started. As already explained, if an irregular game occurs during the additional period, it corresponds to the type of base production for the additional period in the additional period and the irregular production corresponding to the degree of progress of the base production for the additional period. is executed instead of the base effect for the add-on period. This irregular production is set as a series of productions, and the last production content in the series of productions is continued by continuing the state in which the game in which the number of bets is "3" in the non-CB state is not executed. If this occurs, the series of effects will be executed again from the first effect content.

If a negative determination is made in step S4102, if a negative determination is made in step S4104, or if the process of step S4105 is executed, it is determined whether any data table is stored in the fourth control area 122. (step S4106). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4106, data setting processing from the fourth control area 122 is executed (step S4107). In the data setting process from the fourth control area 122, in the data table stored in the fourth control area 122, the image data, sound data, and light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are set. read out. Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, in the data table stored in the fourth control area 122, the effects during the irregular period corresponding to the various data set in correspondence with the current pointer information to be referred to are displayed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image. It will be executed by the display device 63 .

If a negative determination is made in step S4106, it is determined whether or not any data table is stored in the second control area 112 (step S4108). If a negative determination is made in step S4108, data setting processing from the first control area 111 is executed (step S4109). In the data setting process from the first control area 111, in the data table stored in the first control area 111, image data, sound data, and light emission data set in correspondence with the current pointer information to be referred to are set. read out. Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. When the AT data table is stored in the first control area 111, the image data, sound data, and light emission data set in the AT data table corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are read. . Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the base effect of the AT state ST5 corresponding to various data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. will be

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4108, data setting processing from the second control area 112 is executed (step S4110). In the data setting process from the second control area 112, in the data table stored in the second control area 112, the image data, sound data, and light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are set. read out. Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. When the second control area 112 stores the data table for the additional period, the image data, the audio data, and the light emission data set in the data table for the additional period corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to read out. Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the base effects for the additional period corresponding to the various data set in the data table for the additional period corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are displayed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. will be executed. In addition, when the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, the image data, sound data and light emission data set in the ending data table corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to read out. Then, display control of the image display device 63 is executed according to the read image data, sound output control of the speaker 62 is executed according to the read sound data, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed according to the read light emission data. As a result, the base effect of the ending period corresponding to the various data set in the ending data table corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. will be

When the process of step S4107 is executed, when the process of step S4109 is executed, or when the process of step S4110 is executed, it is determined whether or not any game data table is stored in the third control area 113. (step S4111). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4111, data setting processing from the third control area 113 is executed (step S4112). In the data setting process from the third control area 113, in the data table stored in the third control area 113, the image data, sound data, and light emission data set corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to are set. read out. Then, the display control of the image display device 63 is performed so that the image corresponding to the read image data is added to the effect image corresponding to the data table of the first control area 111, the second control area 112 or the fourth control area 122. , and the speaker 62 so that the sound output corresponding to the read audio data is superimposed on the sound output of the base effect corresponding to the data table of the first control area 111, the second control area 112, or the fourth control area 122 is executed, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed so that the light emission pattern corresponding to the read light emission data is executed by interrupting the light emission pattern of the base effect.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When a game of an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base production for the additional period is being executed, the production during the irregularity corresponding to the progress of the base production for the additional period at that time is executed. . As a result, it becomes possible to associate the execution contents of the performance during the irregular period with the progress of the base performance for the additional period, and it is possible to diversify the execution modes of the performance during the irregular period. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the execution of the irregular production instead of the situation where the base production for the additional period is not continued due to the occurrence of the irregular game. Become.

An irregular data table is pre-stored in the performance-side ROM 93, and when an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base performance for the additional period is being executed, the progress of the base performance for the additional period is displayed. is specified from the data table for irregularity, and the specified content of the irregular effect is executed. As a result, while reducing the processing load, it is possible to execute an irregular effect corresponding to the progress of the base effect for the additional period.

In addition, the production content of the irregular production is not limited to the configuration that is unrelated to the execution content of the base production for the additional period immediately before the start of the irregular production, and the production content of the irregular production is the relevant It may be configured to correspond to the execution content of the base effect for the additional period immediately before the start of the effect during the irregular period. For example, the character image displayed at the timing when the irregular game game occurs in the base effect for the additional period may be configured to continue to be displayed in the effect during the irregular game. As a result, it is possible to associate the effect content of the effect during the irregular with the effect content of the base effect for the additional period at the timing when the game of the irregular game occurs.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in the manner in which the effect is executed when the irregular game is executed during the additional period of the AT state ST5. The configuration different from that of the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the irregular processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the MPU 92 on the effect side. Irregular processing is executed in step S3217 in the effect control processing for AT (FIG. 59).

When a game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 during the additional period (steps S4201 and S4202: YES), it is determined whether or not the first progress/stop flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". (step S4203). The first progress stop flag indicates that the production side is in a situation where the progress of the base production for the addition period is stopped triggered by the occurrence of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3) during the addition period. It is a flag for specifying in MPU92.

If the first progress/stop flag is not set to "1" (step S4203: NO), it is determined whether or not the game started this time is in the CB state (step S4204). If the game started this time is in the CB state (step S4204: YES), selection processing of the progress/stopped data table is executed (step S4205). In the selection process, the progress/stopped data table is selected from a plurality of types of game data tables included in the game data table group 104 of the effect-side ROM 93 . Then, the selected progress/stopped data table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference target, and stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4206). In this case, after the third control area 113 is cleared to "0", the progress/stopped data table read this time is stored in the third control area 113 . By storing the progress/stopped data table in the third control area 113, the performance is controlled according to the progress/stopped data table. As a result, the image display device 63 displays an image "progress stop!" An area other than the area where the middle image G71 is displayed (that is, the area where the image of the base effect for the additional period is displayed) is put into a dark display state G72 so that it is displayed more dimly than before.

Since the audio data corresponding to the in-stop notification is set in the in-progress/stop data table, the sound corresponding to the in-stop notification is output from the speaker 62 . Further, since the light emission data corresponding to the stop information is set in the progress stop data table, the upper lamp 61 emits light corresponding to the stop information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although image data for enabling display corresponding to the stop notification is set in the progress stop data table, at least one of the audio data and the light emission data is set. It is good also as the composition which is not set.

After that, "1" is set to the first progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4207). As a result, the updating of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is stopped. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped. However, even when the progress of the base effect for the add-on period is stopped, the image of the base effect for the add-on period is displayed on the image display device 63 using the image data corresponding to the pointer information in the stopped state. is displayed. As described above, the image of the base effect for the additional period is displayed dimly based on the progress/stopped data table stored in the third control area 113 of the effect-side RAM 94 . Image processing is performed to

After that, it is determined whether or not the second progress/stop flag provided in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4208). The second progress stop flag indicates that the production side is in a situation where the progress of the base production for the addition period is stopped, triggered by the occurrence of a game in which the number of bets in the non-CB state is "2" during the addition period. It is a flag for specifying in MPU92.

When "1" is set to the second progress/stop flag (step S4208: YES), the fourth control area 122 of the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4209). As a result, the data table for executing the effect during irregularity stored in the fourth control area 122 is erased, and the effect during irregularity is ended. In other words, even if the irregular effect is started due to the occurrence of a game in which the number of bets in the non-CB state is "2" during the additional period, if the CB state occurs after that, the irregular effect will not be performed. After the termination, the in-stop notification is started. After that, the second progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4210).

If "1" is set in the first progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4203: YES), it is determined whether or not the game started this time is a CB state game (step S4211). If the game started this time is a CB game (step S4211: YES), this irregular processing is terminated without executing the processing of steps S4212 and S4213. As a result, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped, and the state in which the in-stop notification is being executed is maintained.

If the game started this time is not in the CB state (step S4211: NO), the third control area 113 is cleared to "0" (step S4212). This ends the execution of the in-stop notification. Also, the first progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4213). As a result, the state in which updating of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is stopped is cancelled. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the add-on period is restarted. In this case, the base effect for the additional period is restarted from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

When a negative determination is made in step S4204, or when the process of step S4213 is executed, it is determined whether or not the second progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4214). If the second progress/stop flag is not set to "1" (step S4214: NO), it is determined whether or not the game with the number of bets of "2" is the game started this time (step S4215). .

If the game with the number of bets of "2" is the game started this time (step S4215: YES), the irregular data table selection process is executed (step S4216). In the selection process, among the plurality of types of irregular data tables included in the irregular data table group 121 of the effect-side ROM 93, the type of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 is selected. Select the type of irregular data table. Also, the current pointer information to be referred to in the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112 is grasped (step S4217). Then, from among the first to fifth data tables in the irregular data table selected at step S4216, the data table set corresponding to the pointer information grasped at step S4217 is selected (step S4218). The selected data table is read from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference object, and stored in the fourth control area 122 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4219). In this case, after the fourth control area 122 is cleared to “0”, the data table read this time is stored in the fourth control area 122 . By storing the data table in the fourth control area 122, the performance is controlled according to the data table. As a result, instead of the base effect for the additional period, the effect during irregular corresponding to the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is executed. In this case, the effect during irregularity is executed in each of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 as already described.

After that, "1" is set to the second progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4220). As a result, the updating of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is stopped. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped. In addition, the effect during the irregular period according to the data table stored in the fourth control area 122 has priority over the base effect for the additional period according to the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112. Since it is executed, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are in a state where the base effect for the additional period is not executed.

If "1" is set in the second progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4214: YES), it is determined whether or not the game with the number of bets of "2" is the game started this time. (Step S4221). If the game with the number of bets of "2" is the game started this time (step S4221: YES), this irregular processing ends without executing the processing of steps S4222 and S4223. As a result, the state in which the irregular production is executed instead of the base production for the additional period is maintained.

If the game with the number of bets of "2" is not the game started this time (step S4221: NO), the fourth control area 122 is cleared to "0" (step S4222). As a result, the execution of the effect during the irregular period is terminated. Also, the second progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4223). As a result, the state in which updating of the pointer information of the additional period data table stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 is stopped is cancelled. Therefore, the progress of the base effect for the add-on period is restarted. In this case, the base effect for the additional period is restarted from the effect content at the timing when the previous irregular game was started.

FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing of the second control area 112 executed by the effect side MPU 92. FIG. The pointer update process for the second control area 112 is executed at step S3306 in the task process (FIG. 60).

If "1" is set to either the first progress/stop flag or the second progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4301: YES), this second The pointer update processing of the control area 112 is ended. Therefore, when either the first progress/stop flag or the second progress/stop flag is set to "1", the pointer information in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is not updated. .

If "1" is not set to both the first progress/stop flag and the second progress/stop flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4301: NO), in the data table read to the second control area 112, A process for updating pointer information to be referred to is executed (step S4302). Specifically, when the add-on period data table is stored in the second control area 112, immediately after the add-on period data table is stored in the second control area 112, in the add-on period data table The pointer information in the first order is set as the pointer information to be referenced. Further, after the performance execution control is started in accordance with the data table for the additional period stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the next order is newly referred to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as power pointer information. Further, when the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, immediately after the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, pointer information of the first order in the ending data table is set as the pointer information to be referenced. Further, after the performance execution control is started according to the ending data table stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information in the next order should be newly referred to the current pointer information to be referred to. Set as pointer information.

After that, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the second control area 112 exceeds the pointer information in the last order in the data table (step S4303). When the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table exceeds the last pointer information in the additional period data table judge. In addition, when the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, it is determined whether or not the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table exceeds the last pointer information in the ending data table. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4303, the pointer information to be referred to in the data table stored in the second control area 112 is set to the pointer information of the first order in the data table (step S4304). When the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information to be referred to in the additional period data table is set to the first pointer information in the additional period data table. When the ending data table is stored in the second control area 112, the pointer information to be referred to in the ending data table is set to the first pointer information in the ending data table.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the game of the irregular game occurs in the situation where the base effect for the additional period is executed, the contents of the effect are the case of the game of the CB state as the game of the irregular game and the state of the non-CB state, and bet. It may be different from the case where the game with the number "2" occurs. As a result, when an irregular game game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, it is possible to set the effect content corresponding to it, and the effect content can be changed to the type of the irregular game. It is possible to correspond to Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the base effect for the additional period.

When a game in a CB state occurs as a game of an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, a notice during stop using the image of the base effect for the additional period at that time is executed, In a situation where the base effect for the add-on period is being executed, if a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a non-CB state as a game of the irregular game occurs, the base effect for the add-on period at that time occurs. An irregular production that does not use an image is executed. As a result, it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that the progress of the base effect for the additional period is stopped when the irregular game games occur continuously, and the irregular game games can be performed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the base performance for the additional period is continuing even if the base performance for the additional period is not actually continued in a situation that can occur in a single shot. .

In addition, when a CB state game occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, a stop notification using the image of the base effect for the additional period at that time is executed. In the situation where the base effect for the addition period is being executed, if a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a non-CB state as a game of the irregular game occurs, the base for the addition period at that time is generated. Although the configuration is such that an irregular effect is executed without using an effect image, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a situation where the base effect for the addition period is being executed, if a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a non-CB state as a game of the irregular game occurs, the base effect for the addition period at that time When a game in a CB state occurs as an irregular game in a situation in which a stop notice using an effect image is executed and a base effect for the additional period is executed, the base for the additional period at that time is generated. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an irregular effect is executed without using an effect image.

In addition, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a non-CB state as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, the base effect for the additional period at that time is generated. When a game in a CB state occurs as a game of an irregular game in a situation in which a stop notification using an image of a performance is executed and a base performance for the additional period is executed, the base performance for the additional period ends. Then, the base effect for the AT state ST5 may be started.

In addition, when a game in CB state occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, a notice during stop using the image of the base effect for the additional period at that time is executed. When a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a non-CB state as an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, the base effect for the additional period ends. Then, the base effect for the AT state ST5 may be started.

In addition, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a non-CB state as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, the base effect for the additional period at that time is generated. When a game in CB state occurs as a game of irregular game in a situation where an irregular effect that does not use an effect image is executed and a base effect for the additional period is executed, the base effect for the additional period is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the base effect for the AT state ST5 is started after the end.

In addition, when a game in the CB state occurs as a game of the irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, an effect during the irregular period that does not use the image of the base effect for the additional period at that time is performed. In a situation where the base effect for the additional period is being executed, if a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a non-CB state as a game of the irregular game occurs, the base effect for the additional period is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the base effect for the AT state ST5 is started after the end.

<Fourth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described second embodiment in the manner in which the effect is executed in a situation in which the AT state ST5 is neither the addition period nor the ending period. The configuration different from that of the second embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing AT state processing at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . Note that the AT state processing at the start of the game is executed at step S2804 in the advantageous state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 52).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4401). As in the first embodiment, the first ending flag indicates to the main MPU 72 that the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2, which is counted using the number-of-continued-games counter 74c, reaches the maximum number of games. This is a flag for specifying As in the first embodiment, the second ending flag indicates that there is a high possibility that the limited total number of net additions of game media, which is counted using the total acquisition number counter 74d, will reach the upper limit net addition number. It is a flag for specifying in main side MPU72. If "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag (step S4401: YES), the processes after step S4402 are not executed. As a result, in a situation where the number of games executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where there is a high possibility that the total net increase number with the restriction of game media will reach the upper limit net increase number, Processing for increasing the number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 is not executed.

If "1" is not set to both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S4401: NO), it is determined whether the value of the additional period counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more. , it is determined whether or not the current state is the add-on period in the AT state ST5 (step S4402). The add-on period counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is an add-on period and the number of remaining games to be played during the add-on period. If the value of the add-on period counter is 1 or more and it is the add-on period (step S4402: YES), the add-on period process is executed (step S4403). In the additional period processing, the same processing as steps S3013 to S3021 in the AT state processing (FIG. 54) at the start of the game in the first embodiment is executed.

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S4402: NO), it is determined whether the value of the add-on standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S4404). . The add-on standby counter indicates that the shift to the add-on period is on standby in a situation where the shift to the add-on period is confirmed, and the number of games required until the shift to the add-on period is indicated by the main MPU 72. This is a counter for specifying.

If the value of the addition standby counter of the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S4404: NO), one of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game. (step S4405: YES), the transition lottery process for the additional period is executed (step S4406). In the addition period transition lottery process, the addition period transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to add the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5. It is determined by lottery whether or not to shift to the additional period in which is likely to occur. In the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the winning combination in this game, if the player wins with the index value IV=11, there is a 10% chance that the player wins during the additional period, and the player wins with the index value IV=12. In this case, there is a 5% probability that the player will be selected for the transition to the additional period, and if the index value IV=13 is won, there is a 20% chance that the player will be selected for the transition to the additional period and the index value IV=14 will be selected. In this case, there is a probability of 15% that the player will be selected for the transition to the additional period. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning during the additional period. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

If the addition period transition win is won (step S4407: YES), the addition standby counter is set to "10" corresponding to the number of addition transition standby games (step S4408). After that, an add-on standby command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4409). The addition waiting command makes the player expect that the transition to the addition period will be made, and makes the effect side MPU 92 recognize that the present sign period in which the effect indicating that the transition to the addition period will finally be executed should be started. command. When receiving the add-on standby command, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the effect of this sign period over the number of add-on shift standby games.

During this sign period, as the contents of the effects of each game on the image display device 63, effects with a high degree of expectation for transition to the additional period are likely to be executed. In addition, during this sign period, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of this precursory period, an effect in which the same character is displayed or an effect in accordance with a series of stories may be executed between a plurality of games. Then, an effect is displayed for the player to recognize that the transition to the additional period will occur in the final game.

If a series of story effects are executed between multiple games to be executed during the Omen Period, the series of story effects will correspond to each of the multiple games. Each game included in the plurality of games executes an effect within the corresponding effect range. In this case, if the next game for the predetermined game has not started despite the end timing of the effect range corresponding to the predetermined game among the plurality of games, the next game The still image at the end timing continues to be displayed on the image display device 63 until is started. In addition, when the next game for the predetermined game is started in a situation where the end timing of the effect range corresponding to the predetermined game among the plurality of games has not yet come, the game corresponding to the predetermined game is selected. The effect range is terminated at that point, and the effect of the effect range corresponding to the next game is started.

If the transition to the additional period is not won (step S4407: NO), a lottery process for generating a false portent period is executed (step S4410). In the false portent period generation lottery process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a false portent period by using a table for false portent lottery provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74. Determined by In the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role in this game, if the index value IV=11 is won, there is a probability of 20% that the false sign period will be won, and the index value IV=12 will be won. If there is, there is a 10% probability that the false omen period will be won, and if the index value IV = 13 is won, the false omen period will be won with a 40% probability, and the index value IV = 14 will be won. If it is, the false sign period will be won with a probability of 30%, and if the index value IV=15 is won, the probability of the false sign period will be won with a probability of 20%. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning during the false portent period.

If the occurrence of the false portent period is won (step S4411: YES), a false portent command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4412). The false portent command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the false portent period should be started. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the false portent command, the effect of the false portent period is not already started. The effect of the false portent period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 over the number of portent games.

During the false portent period, as the effect content of each game on the image display device 63, an effect with a high degree of expectation for transition to the additional period is likely to be executed. Also, during the false omen period, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of the false omen period, an effect in which the same character is displayed between a plurality of games or an effect in accordance with a series of stories can be executed. Then, an effect is displayed to make the player recognize that the transition to the additional period will not occur in the final game.

When a series of story effects are executed between multiple games for which the false omen period is to be executed, the series of story effects correspond to each of the multiple games. Each game included in the plurality of games executes an effect of the corresponding effect range. In this case, if the next game for the predetermined game has not started even though the end timing of the effect range corresponding to the predetermined game among the plurality of games has come, the next game The still image at the end timing continues to be displayed on the image display device 63 until is started. In addition, when the next game for the predetermined game is started in a situation where the end timing of the effect range corresponding to the predetermined game among the plurality of games has not yet come, the game corresponding to the predetermined game is started. The effect range is terminated at that point, and the effect of the effect range corresponding to the next game is started.

The effect executed during the false portent period can also be executed during the actual portent period. Therefore, when an effect with a high degree of expectation for transition to the additional period frequently occurs between a plurality of games, the player expects the present precursor period. It should be noted that, as a part of the effects that can be executed during the bounty period, it is possible to include a part of the effects that are executed during the bona fide omen period but not during the false omen period. may include an effect with a higher probability of occurrence than the false portent period.

If the occurrence of the false portent period is not won (step S4411: NO), other processing is executed (step S4413). In other processes, the same processes as steps S3009 to S3012 of the AT state process (FIG. 54) at the start of the game in the first embodiment are executed.

If the value of the add-on standby counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, indicating that it is in the present precursor period (step S4404: YES), the value of the add-on standby counter is subtracted by 1 (step S4414). If the value of the additional standby counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S4415: YES), the number of continuous games is added (step S4416). In the process of adding the number of continuous games, the number of games equal to or greater than the number of continuous games for which the additional period continues is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 . Specifically, the additional period continues over 10 games, and in step S4416, 20 games, which is the number of games equal to or greater than 10 games, is added to the value of the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74. FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 from becoming "0" in the middle of the additional period.

After that, the first addition command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4417). The first addition command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the number of games has been added when the transition is made to the addition period. In addition, the first addition command includes information on 20 games, which is the number of games to be added this time. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first addition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute an effect indicating that the number of games has been added at the time of transition to the addition period. do. After that, "1" is set to the addition winning flag of the main side RAM 74 (step S4418). When "1" is set to the add-on win flag and the current game ends, as in the first embodiment, a process for shifting to the add-on period is executed.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various table groups 101 to 104, 121, 125 provided in the production-side ROM 93 of this embodiment.

Various table groups 101 to 104, 121, and 125 are stored in the production-side ROM 93 in the same manner as in the second embodiment. A data table group 104 for irregularities and a data table group 121 for irregularities are stored in advance, and a data table group 125 for signs is stored in advance.

The portent data table group 125 includes a plurality of types of real portent data tables and a plurality of types of false portent data tables. The data table for this sign is set with data for performing execution control of the base effect for this sign period in this sign period. Specifically, in this data table for signs, as in other data tables, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers, and each piece of pointer information is associated with a combination of image data, sound data, and light emission data. is set. A plurality of types of this predictive data table are provided corresponding to each number of games included in the number of waiting games to be added.

That is, a plurality of types of main sign data tables are provided corresponding to 10 games, which is the number of games waiting to be added, and these plurality of types of main sign data tables correspond to the main sign period for 10 games. Data for performing execution control of production is set. These multiple types of main sign data tables are different in at least part of the production contents of the production corresponding to the main sign period for 10 games.

A plurality of types of main sign data tables are provided corresponding to the 9 games, and these plurality of types of main sign data tables contain data for controlling the execution of effects corresponding to the main sign periods for the 9 games. is set. These multiple types of main sign data tables are different in at least part of the production contents of the production corresponding to the main sign period for nine games.

A plurality of types of main sign data tables are provided corresponding to the 8 games, and the plurality of types of main sign data tables contain data for controlling the execution of effects corresponding to the main sign periods for the 8 games. is set. These multiple types of main sign data tables are different in at least part of the production contents of the production corresponding to the main sign period for eight games.

A plurality of types of main sign data tables are provided corresponding to the seven games, and these plurality of types of main sign data tables contain data for controlling the execution of effects corresponding to the main sign periods for the seven games. is set. These multiple types of main sign data tables are different in at least a part of the effect contents corresponding to the main sign period for seven games.

A plurality of types of main sign data tables are provided corresponding to the 6 games, and these plurality of types of main sign data tables contain data for controlling the execution of effects corresponding to the main sign periods for the 6 games. is set. These multiple types of main sign data tables are different in at least part of the effect contents corresponding to the main sign period for six games.

A plurality of types of main sign data tables are provided corresponding to the five games, and these plurality of types of main sign data tables contain data for controlling the execution of effects corresponding to the main sign periods for the five games. is set. These multiple types of main sign data tables differ in at least part of the presentation contents of the presentation corresponding to the main sign period for five games.

A plurality of types of main sign data tables are provided corresponding to the four games, and the plurality of types of main sign data tables contain data for controlling the execution of effects corresponding to the main sign periods for the four games. is set. These multiple types of main precursor data tables differ in at least part of the production contents of the production corresponding to the main precursor period for four games.

A plurality of types of main sign data tables are provided corresponding to the three games, and the plurality of types of main sign data tables contain data for controlling the execution of effects corresponding to the main sign periods for the three games. is set. These multiple types of main sign data tables differ in at least part of the presentation contents of the presentation corresponding to the main sign period for three games.

A plurality of types of main sign data tables are provided corresponding to the two games, and these plurality of types of main sign data tables contain data for controlling the execution of effects corresponding to the main sign periods for the two games. is set. These multiple types of main sign data tables differ in at least part of the presentation contents of the presentation corresponding to the main sign period for two games.

A plurality of types of main sign data tables are provided to correspond to one game, and these plurality of types of main sign data tables contain data for controlling the execution of effects corresponding to the main sign period for one game. is set. These multiple types of main sign data tables are different in at least a part of the production contents of the production corresponding to one game's worth of the main sign period.

Details will be described later, but if an irregular game occurs in the middle of this sign period, the production of this sign period that has been executed up to that point is terminated, and the irregular game ends and the non-CB state is bet. When a game with a number of "3" is started, this precursor period corresponding to the number of games remaining until transition to the addition period at that time is newly started. In this case, as described above, a plurality of types of this predictive data table are provided corresponding to each number of games included in the number of games waiting to be added, so that the number of waiting games to be added is executed. Not only during this sign period, but also after the end of the sign period due to the occurrence of an irregular game during the sign period. It becomes possible to

The false portent data table is set with data for performing execution control of the base performance for the false portent period during the false portent period. Specifically, in the data table for false omens, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set in serial numbers as in the other data tables, and combinations of image data, sound data and light emission data are associated with each piece of pointer information. is set. The false sign data table is provided to correspond to 10 games, which is the same number of games as the number of waiting games to be added, and is not provided to correspond to any other number of games.

During this portent period, the data table for this portent is read out to the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 . The base effect for the present sign is executed by controlling the execution of the effect according to the data table for the present sign. Also, during the false portent period, the data table for false portents is read out to the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 . The base effect for the false portent is executed by controlling the execution of the effect according to the data table for the false portent.

The irregular data table group 121 includes multiple types of irregular data tables. As an irregular data table, as in the second embodiment, when an irregular game occurs in the additional period, it is used to control the execution of the irregular production that is executed instead of the base production for the additional period. An irregular data table is provided. As in the second embodiment, a plurality of types of irregular data tables are provided for use when an irregular game occurs during the additional period. The contents of the irregular data table are the same as in the second embodiment.

As a data table for irregular, when an irregular game occurs in the real sign period or the false sign period, the execution control of the production during the irregular which is executed instead of the base production for the main sign or the base production for the false sign An irregular data table is provided for this purpose. Only one type of irregular data table is provided to be used when an irregular game occurs during the real sign period or the false sign period. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of irregular data tables may be provided. In this case, an irregular data table to be referred to when an irregular game occurs during the present sign period and an irregular data table to be referred to when an irregular game occurs during the false sign period are provided. It may be configured as According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to grasp whether the current irregular game occurred during the real sign period or the false sign period, depending on the execution contents of the effect during the irregular period. In addition, an irregular data table that is likely to be referenced when an irregular game occurs during the present precursor period and an irregular data table that is likely to be referenced when an irregular game occurs during the false precursor period are provided. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to predict whether the current irregular game has a higher probability of the real precursor period or the false precursor period depending on the execution contents of the effect during the irregular period.

The irregular data table is read to the fourth control area 122 of the effect side RAM 94 in the same manner as in the second embodiment. The effect during the irregular is executed by controlling the execution of the effect according to the irregular data table. The fourth control area 122 is set to have a higher priority for reference than the second control area 112, as in the second embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the effect control process for AT in this embodiment executed by the effect side MPU 92 . The effect control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

If the add-on standby command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4501: YES), the selection process of the precursor data table is executed (step S4502). In the selection process, the main portent data table to be referred to during the current portent period is determined by lottery among the plurality of types of the portent data tables included in the portent data table group 125 of the effect-side ROM 93 . In this case, a lottery is made for a plurality of types of main sign data tables provided corresponding to 10 games, which is the number of waiting games to be added. At the time of the lottery, a reference object determination table pre-stored in the performance-side ROM 93 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the performance-side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities are the same for each of the plurality of types of this portent data table provided to correspond to the 10 games.

After that, the data table for this portent of the type selected in step S4502 is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference target, and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4503). In this case, after the second control area 112 is cleared to "0", the present precursor data table of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112 . By storing the data table for this portent in the second control area 112, the performance execution control is performed according to the data table for this portent, and the base performance for this portent period is executed.

After that, the main portent flag provided in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4504), and the value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the main portent period is set to the portent counter provided in the effect-side RAM 94, which is "10". ” is set (step S4505). This portent flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that it is the main portent period, and the portent counter counts the number of games remaining in the portent period in either the actual portent period or the false portent period. This is a counter for specifying by the effect side MPU 92 . When this portent flag is set to "1", the value of the portent counter is decremented by "1" every time one game is finished.

If the false portent command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S4506: YES), on condition that the false portent flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S4507: NO), Execute processing to start the false aura period. The false portent flag is a flag for the effecting MPU 92 to specify that it is a false portent period. Since the master side MPU 72 cannot grasp whether or not the performance corresponding to the false portent period is being executed, it can transmit the false portent command even during the execution of the performance corresponding to the false portent period. On the other hand, when the effect corresponding to the false portent period is already being executed, the effect side MPU 92 continues the effect corresponding to the false portent period already being executed even if the false portent command is newly received. , the newly received false portent command is not used as a trigger to newly start an effect corresponding to the false portent period.

Specifically, as the processing for starting the false portent period, first, processing for selecting a portent data table is executed (step S4508). In the selection process, a false portent data table to be referred to during the current false portent period is determined by lottery among the plurality of types of false portent data tables included in the portent data table group 125 of the effect-side ROM 93 . At the time of the lottery, a reference object determination table pre-stored in the performance-side ROM 93 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the performance-side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of the multiple types of false portent data tables are the same.

After that, the type of false portent data table selected in step S4508 is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference target, and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4509). In this case, after the second control area 112 is cleared to "0", the second control area 112 is made to store the type of false portent data table read this time. By storing the false portent data table in the second control area 112, the execution control of the effect is performed according to the false portent data table, and the base effect for the false portent period is executed. After that, "1" is set to the false portent flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4510), and "10", which is the value corresponding to the number of games that are the same as the number of continuous games in the present portent period, is set to the portent counter of the effect-side RAM 94. set (step S4511). When the false portent flag is set to "1", the value of the portent counter is decremented by "1" every time one game is finished.

If the process of step S4505 is performed, if the determination is negative in step S4506, if the determination is negative in step S4507, or if the process of step S4511 is performed, if it is not the additional period (step S4512: NO), on condition that the start command of the additional period has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4513: YES), select processing of the data table for the additional period is executed (step S4514). In the selection processing, a data table for an add-on period to be referred to in the present add-on period is determined by lottery among a plurality of types of add-on period data tables included in the add-on period data table group 102 of the effect-side ROM 93 . At the time of this lottery, a reference object determination table stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the effect side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of the multiple types of data tables for additional periods are the same.

Thereafter, the type of addition period data table selected in step S4514 is read out from the performance-side ROM 93 as a reference target, and stored in the second control area 112 of the performance-side RAM 94 (step S4515). In this case, after the second control area 112 is cleared to “0”, the data table for the addition period of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112 . As a result, even if the main sign data table is stored in the second control area 112, the additional period data table is stored in the second control area 112 after it is erased. By storing the data table for the additional period in the second control area 112, execution control of the performance is performed according to the data table for the additional period, and the base performance for the additional period is executed. After that, the main precursor flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4516).

If the start command of the additional period has not been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S4513: NO), the effect It is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter in the side RAM 94 is "0" (step S4518).

If the value of the portent counter is "0" (step S4518: YES), the false portent flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4519). Also, the second control area 112 is cleared to "0" (step S4520). As a result, the false portent data table stored in the second control area 112 is erased.

If it is the add-on period (step S4512: YES), on condition that the end command of the add-on period is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S4521: YES), the second control area 112 of the production side RAM 94 is set to "0". Clear (step S4522). By clearing the second control area 112 to "0", the performance execution control according to the AT data table stored in the first control area 111 is resumed, and the base performance of the AT state ST5 is executed. . After that, "1" is set to the addition period end flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4523). The add-on period end flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to grasp the situation after the add-on period has ended.

When the process of step S4516 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S4517, when a negative determination is made in step S4518, when the process of step S4520 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S4521, or step When the process of S4523 is executed, after the irregular process at the time of precursor is executed (step S4524), other processes are executed (step S4525). In other processes, the same processes as steps S3216 to S3219 in the AT effect control process (FIG. 59) in the first embodiment are executed. Incidentally, in the irregular processing in step S3217, the irregular processing (FIG. 75) in the second embodiment is executed.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the irregular processing at the time of a sign executed in step S4524 in the effect control processing for AT (FIG. 81).

If "1" is set in the present precursor flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4601: YES), on condition that the game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S4602: YES), the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4603). The sign stop flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the progress of the base effect for the present sign period is stopped.

If "1" is not set in the sign stop flag (step S4603: NO), it is checked whether the game started this time is either a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state. Determine (step S4604). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is an irregular game.

If the current game is an irregular game (step S4604: YES), the second control area 112 is cleared to "0" (step S4605). As a result, the main sign data table stored in the second control area 112 is erased. Therefore, the execution of the base effect for the present sign period ends in the middle.

After that, selection processing of the irregular data table is executed (step S4606). In the selection process, one type of irregular data table provided to correspond to the occurrence of an irregular game during the real precursor period or the false precursor period is selected. Then, the selected irregular data table is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference object, and stored in the fourth control area 122 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4607). In this case, after the fourth control area 122 is cleared to “0”, the irregular data table read this time is stored in the fourth control area 122 . By storing the irregular data table in the fourth control area 122, the performance is controlled according to the irregular data table. As a result, instead of the base effect for this precursor period, the during irregular effect corresponding to the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is executed. In this case, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 each perform an irregular effect. After that, "1" is set to the sign stop flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S4608).

If "1" is set in the omen stop flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S4603: YES), the game started this time is either a game with a bet number of "2" or a game in CB state. It is determined whether or not (step S4609). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is an irregular game. If the current game is an irregular game (step S4609: YES), the processing of steps S4610 to S4613 is not executed. As a result, the state in which the irregular effect is executed instead of the base effect for the present sign period is maintained.

If the current game is not an irregular game (step S4609: NO), the fourth control area 122 is cleared to "0" (step S4610). As a result, the execution of the effect during the irregular period is terminated. In addition, selection processing of the portent data table is executed (step S4611). In the selection process, first, based on the value of the precursor counter in the effect-side RAM 94, the number of games remaining in the precursor period is grasped. Then, a lottery is drawn for a plurality of types of main sign data tables provided corresponding to the number of games remaining in the main sign period among the plurality of types of main sign data tables included in the sign data table group 125 of the production side ROM 93. As a target, the present data table for a sign to be referred to is determined by lottery. At the time of the lottery, a reference object determination table pre-stored in the performance-side ROM 93 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the performance-side RAM 94 are used. The selection probabilities of each of the plurality of types of this portent data table provided corresponding to each game are the same. As a result, the data table for the present portent corresponding to the number of games remaining in the present portent period is selected.

After that, the data table for this portent of the type selected in step S4611 is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference target, and stored in the second control area 112 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4612). In this case, after the second control area 112 is cleared to “0”, the present precursor data table of the type read this time is stored in the second control area 112 . By storing the main sign data table in the second control area 112, the performance execution control is performed according to the main sign data table, and the base production for the main sign period is newly started. After that, the premonition stop flag of the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4613).

If "1" is set in the false portent flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4614: YES), on condition that the game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S4615: YES), the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4616). The portent end flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the base effect for the false portent period has ended due to the occurrence of the irregular game.

If the sign end flag is not set to "1" (step S4616: NO), it is determined whether the game started this time is either a game with a bet number of "2" or a CB state game. (step S4617). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is an irregular game.

If the current game is an irregular game (step S4617: YES), the second control area 112 is cleared to "0" (step S4618). As a result, the false portent data table stored in the second control area 112 is erased. Therefore, the execution of the base effect for the false portent period is terminated in the middle.

After that, selection processing of the irregular data table is executed (step S4619). In the selection process, one type of irregular data table provided to correspond to the occurrence of an irregular game during the real precursor period or the false precursor period is selected. Then, the selected irregular data table is read out from the effect-side ROM 93 as a reference object, and stored in the fourth control area 122 of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S4620). In this case, after the fourth control area 122 is cleared to “0”, the irregular data table read this time is stored in the fourth control area 122 . By storing the irregular data table in the fourth control area 122, the performance is controlled according to the irregular data table. As a result, instead of the base effect for the false portent period, the during-irregular effect corresponding to the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is executed. In this case, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 each perform an irregular effect. After that, "1" is set to the sign end flag of the production side RAM 94 (step S4621).

If "1" is set in the indication end flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S4616: YES), is the game started this time a game with a bet number of "2" or a CB state game? It is determined whether or not (step S4622). That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is an irregular game. If the current game is an irregular game (step S4622: YES), the irregular processing ends without executing the processing of steps S4623 to S4625. As a result, the state in which the irregular effect is executed instead of the base effect for the false portent period is maintained.

If the current game is not an irregular game (step S4622: NO), the fourth control area 122 is cleared to "0" (step S4623). As a result, the execution of the effect during the irregular period is terminated. In addition, the portent end flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4624), and the false portent flag of the effect-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4625).

Next, the execution mode of the effect when the irregular game occurs in the middle of the real precursor period or the false precursor period will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 83(a) shows the game execution period, FIG. 83(b) shows the situation of the real precursor period or the false precursor period, FIG. 83(c) shows the situation of the additional period, and FIG. ) indicates the period during which the pointer information to be referred to in the data table for real or false portent stored in the second control area 112 can be updated, and FIG. 2” and the game in the CB state) are being executed, and FIG. Indicates a period.

First, the case where an irregular game occurs during the false portent period will be described.

At the timing t1, a new game is started in the AT state ST5 as shown in FIG. 83(a). If any of the index values IV = 11 to 15 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 16) in the relevant game, the transition lottery process for the extra period (step S4406) is executed to win the transition to the extra period. Although there was not, it was won in the false portent period generation lottery process (step S4410). Therefore, at the timing t1, the false portent period starts as shown in FIG. 83(b). In this case, a false portent command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 , thereby storing the false portent data table in the second control area 112 of the effect side RAM 94 . Then, at timing t1, the pointer information to be referred to in the false portent data table can be updated as shown in FIG. 83(d).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(a), the current game ends at timing t2, and a new game is executed from timing t3 to timing t4. This game is not an irregular game like the game from timing t1 to timing t2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83(d), by updating the pointer information to be referred to in the data table for false portents stored in the second control area 112, the base effect for the false portent period proceeds. becomes.

After that, a new game is executed at timings t5 to t6 as shown in FIG. 83(a). Since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2", it is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 83(e). Therefore, at the timing t5, which is the timing at which the game is started, the false portent period ends as shown in FIG. The data table for false precursors that has been set is erased.

Also, at the timing of t5, the irregular data table corresponding to the real precursor period or the false precursor period is stored in the fourth control area 122 of the effect-side RAM 94 . Then, at timing t5, the pointer information to be referred to in the irregular data table can be updated as shown in FIG. 83(f). As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect during the irregular period. It should be noted that, for example, a display as shown in FIG. 74(a) or FIG. 74(b) is performed as a moving image display corresponding to the effect during the irregular period. In addition, the speaker 62 starts outputting sound corresponding to the effect during the irregular period, and the upper lamp 61 starts emitting light corresponding to the effect during the irregular period. The state in which this irregular effect is executed continues until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state game with a bet number of "3" is started. Therefore, even after the irregular game is finished, the state in which the irregular effect is executed is maintained at least until the next game is started.

Thereafter, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 83(a) from timing t7 to timing t8. The game is not an irregular game. Therefore, the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is erased at the timing t7, which is the start timing of the current game, as shown in FIG. 83(f). As a result, the effect during the irregular period is terminated. Further, as already explained, at the timing of t5, which is the timing when the irregular game occurred last time, the fake portent data table is erased from the second control area 112, and the fake portent data table is not read again. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the base effect for the AT state ST5 is restarted according to the data table for AT stored in the first control area 111. FIG.

Next, a case where an irregular game occurs in the middle of this precursor period will be described.

At time t9, a new game is started in AT state ST5 as shown in FIG. 83(a). In the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in the game, the lottery process for the transition of the additional period (step S4406) is executed by winning one of the index values IV=11 to 15. . Therefore, at the timing of t9, the present precursor period starts as shown in FIG. 83(b). In this case, when the addition standby command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92, the main sign data to be referred to from among the plurality of types of main sign data tables provided corresponding to the 10 games is displayed. A table is determined by lottery, and the determined main sign data table is read to the second control area 112 . Then, at the timing of t9, the pointer information to be referred to in this precursor data table can be updated as shown in FIG. 83(d).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(a), the current game ends at timing t10, and a new game is executed from timing t11 to timing t12. This game is not an irregular game like the game from timing t9 to timing t10. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 83(d), by updating the pointer information to be referred to in the present portent data table stored in the second control area 112, the present portent period base effect proceeds. becomes.

Thereafter, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 83(a) at timings t13 to t14. Since the game is in the CB state, it is an irregular game as shown in FIG. 83(e). Therefore, at the timing of t13 when the game is started, the present portent data table stored in the second control area 112 is erased as shown in FIG. 83(d). As a result, the base effect for the present sign period is once terminated at the timing of t13. However, as shown in FIG. 83(b), since this precursor period is not terminated, the situation in which the transition to the additional period is confirmed is maintained.

Also, at the timing of t13, the irregular data table corresponding to the real precursor period or the false precursor period is stored in the fourth control area 122 of the effect-side RAM 94. FIG. Then, at the timing of t13, the pointer information to be referred to in the irregular data table can be updated as shown in FIG. 83(f). As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect during the irregular period. It should be noted that, for example, a display as shown in FIG. 74(a) or FIG. 74(b) is performed as a moving image display corresponding to the effect during the irregular period. In addition, the speaker 62 starts outputting sound corresponding to the effect during the irregular period, and the upper lamp 61 starts emitting light corresponding to the effect during the irregular period. The state in which this irregular effect is executed continues until a normal game that is not an irregular game, that is, a non-CB state game with a bet number of "3" is started. Therefore, even after the irregular game is finished, the state in which the irregular effect is executed is maintained at least until the next game is started.

After that, a plurality of games are executed in the CB state including timings t15 to t16. In other words, each of the plurality of games in the CB state including timings t15 to t16 are irregular games as shown in FIG. 83(e). Therefore, the pointer information to be referred to in the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is updated as shown in FIG. 83(f) from timing t13 to timing t17. As a result, the production during the irregular progresses.

The CB state ends at timing t16. Then, the first game after the CB state ends is executed as shown in FIG. 83(a) over the timing from t17 to t18. The game is not an irregular game. Therefore, the irregular data table stored in the fourth control area 122 is erased at the timing t17, which is the start timing of the current game, as shown in FIG. 83(f). As a result, the production during the irregular period ends.

Also, at the timing of t17, which is the start timing of the current game, the present data table for precursors is read to the second control area 112 again. In this case, at the timing of t13, which is the timing at which the base effect for this precursor period is once terminated due to the occurrence of the irregular game, the game in which the bet number is "3" in the non-CB state in this precursor period. Since the number of executions is two, the remaining number of games in this precursor period at the timing of t17 is eight games. Therefore, the main sign data table to be referred to is determined by lottery from among the plurality of types of main sign data tables provided corresponding to the eight games, and the determined main sign data table is selected as the second data table. It is read out to the control area 112 . Then, as shown in FIG. 83(d), the pointer information to be referred to in this portent data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated. As a result, the present sign effect is newly started. This sign effect corresponds to 8 games, which is the remaining number of games in the present sign period.

After that, during this precursory period including timings t19 to t20, games in the non-CB state with the number of bets of "3" are executed eight times. In this case, the pointer information to be referred to in this portent data table stored in the second control area 112 is updated as shown in FIG. 83(d). As a result, the base effect for the present sign period progresses. Then, at timing t20, which is the end timing of the eighth game, as shown in FIGS. 83(b) and 83(c), this precursor period ends and the addition period starts. In this case, at the timing of t20, after the main precursor base table stored in the second control area 112 is erased, the addition period base table is read to the second control area 112 . As a result, the base effect for the present sign period is terminated and the base effect for the additional period is started.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If an irregular game occurs while the base effect for the real sign period or the base effect for the false sign period is being executed, the base effect being executed is terminated in the middle. As a result, when an irregular game occurs, it is possible to prevent the base effect for the real sign period or the base effect for the false sign period from being continued. Also, when an irregular game occurs, the base effect for the real sign period or the base effect for the false sign period is not temporarily stopped in the middle, but the base effect being executed ends in the middle. Therefore, the effect is newly started after the game of the irregular game is finished. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand the effect contents of the effect executed after the game of the irregular game is finished.

If an irregular game occurs while the base effect for this sign period is being executed, the base effect for this sign period that is being executed is terminated in the middle, and the irregular game game ends. If so, the base effect for this sign period is newly started. As a result, when the irregular game is over, it is possible to provide the player with a new base effect for the precursor period.

When the irregular game game ends and the base effect for the sign period is newly started, the base effect for the sign period will be the content of the effect corresponding to the number of games remaining in the sign period. A performance is selected and executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the present sign period from becoming excessively long due to the occurrence of an irregular game. It is possible to make the performance contents suitable for the remaining number of continuous games in the period.

Even if an irregular game occurs during this precursor period, the number of remaining continuous games during this precursor period does not decrease. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of games in the present sign period from decreasing due to the occurrence of irregular games.

If an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the fake sign period is being executed, the base effect for the fake sign period is terminated in the middle, and the irregular game is considered to have ended. does not start the base rendition for the false omen period. As a result, it is possible to completely end the base effect for the false portent period, which is not directly linked to the provision of profit, with the occurrence of the irregular game as a trigger. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the fact that the profit is not given to the player after all even though the base performance for the false sign period is executed again after the irregular game is finished.

In addition, the base effect for the false sign period is continued as it is even if the game of the irregular game occurs, and the number of games of the false sign period set when the false sign period starts is the number of games of the irregular game A configuration may be adopted in which the base effect for the false portent period is ended when the period including the In other words, in this configuration, the base effect for the present sign period ends when an irregular game game occurs, whereas the base effect for the false sign period is assumed to occur when an irregular game game occurs. will also be continued.

In addition, when an irregular game occurs while the base effect for the present sign period is being executed, the base effect for the present sign period is not limited to the configuration at that point. For example, an image at the timing when an irregular game is generated continues to be displayed as a still image, such as the notification during stop in the first embodiment, and a real sign such as a progress stop image G71 or a dark display state G72 is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which the display state suggests that the progress of the base effect for the period is stopped.

In addition, when a game with a bet number of "2" occurs as an irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the present sign period is being executed, the in-stop notification as in the above-described first embodiment is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the base effect for the present sign period is terminated when a game in the CB state occurs as a game of the irregular game. Further, when a game in the CB state occurs as a game of the irregular game in a situation where the base effect for the sign period is being executed, the in-stop notification as in the first embodiment is executed, and the irregular game is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the base effect for the present sign period ends when a game with a bet number of “2” occurs as a game.

Further, even if an irregular game occurs in a situation where the base effect for the present sign period is being executed, the base effect for the present sign period may be continued as it is. In this case, since the number of games in this sign period is not completed even if the irregular game is played, the base effect for this sign period will be completed before the number of games in this sign period is completed. . Therefore, after the base effect for the present sign period is completed and until the number of games in the present sign period is completed, an effect indicating that the shift to the additional period is in a standby state is executed. Configuration. As a result, even if the base effect for the present sign period is completed before the number of games in the present sign period is completed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) A game in which the number of bets is "2" and a game in the CB state are set as irregular games, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of bets is "2". A certain game may be set as an irregular game, and even if the game is in the CB state, the game in which the number of bets is "3" may not be set as an irregular game. Alternatively, the game in the CB state may be set as the irregular game, and the game in the non-CB state with the bet number of "2" may not be set as the irregular game.

(2) When the game of the irregular game occurs in the situation where the base effect for the addition period or the base effect for the ending period is executed, the execution mode of the notification during stop is that the game of the irregular game occurs. It is not limited to a mode in which the image at the timing is displayed in a dark display state G72 in which the image is dimly displayed and the progress/stop image G71 is displayed. For example, the dark display state G72 may be set, but the progress/stop image G71 may not be displayed, or the progress/stop image G71 may be displayed, but the dark display state G72 may not be displayed. In addition, when the notification during stop is executed in the other form or each of the above-described embodiments, the image at the timing when the irregular game occurs is displayed on the image display device 63 instead of the dark display state G72. A configuration may be adopted in which an image is displayed in a reduced size in the partial area, and an image is displayed in the remaining area to indicate that the progress of the base effect for the additional period or the base effect for the ending period is stopped.

(3) The base effect for the ending period is not limited to the configuration in which even if the first ending command or the second ending command is transmitted from the main MPU 72, it is not started until the AT state ST5 is reached. A configuration may be adopted in which, when the first ending command or the second ending command is transmitted from, the base effect for the ending period is started regardless of whether or not the AT state ST5. In this case, even if the main side MPU 72 transmits the first ending command or the second ending command in the middle of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the base effect for the ending period will be started. .

(4) If an irregular game occurs while the base effect for the additional period (or the base effect for the ending period) is being executed, the base effect for the AT state ST5 is executed, and then the effect is executed. When the game of the regular game ends and the non-CB state and the target game with the number of bets of "3" occur, the base effect for the addition period (or the base effect for the ending period) is restarted. may be

(5) The sum of the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is the second interval. It is not limited to the configuration in which the base effect for the ending period is started when the SC2 upper limit number of games or more is reached and the AT state ST5 is reached. and the value of the AT continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, and in the case of the AT state ST5, the base effect for the ending period is started. It may be configured to be Further, when it is determined that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5, the number of remaining games until the said ending condition is satisfied is the predetermined number of games. (For example, 20 games), the base effect for the ending period may be started. In this case, in the base effect for the ending period, it is preferable to execute the effect according to the series of stories over the predetermined number of games.

(6) Add the value obtained by multiplying the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter and the value of the AT continuation counter by the expected acquisition value of the game media in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d. The result is not limited to the configuration in which the base effect for the ending period is started when the result is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2 and the AT state ST5, and the value of the AT continuation counter is not limited to this. In the AT state ST5, when the result of adding the value of the result of accumulating the acquisition expected value of the game media in the AT state ST5 to the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d becomes equal to or more than the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2, and in the AT state ST5 A configuration may be adopted in which the base effect for the ending period is started in a certain case.

(7) Even if either the add-on period data table or the ending data table is read to the second control area 112, the AT data table read to the first control area 111 is the last data table. The pointer information to be referenced is continuously updated until the pointer information in the order of . For example, when the add-on period data table is read out to the second control area 112, until the pointer information of the last order in the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 becomes the reference target. , the pointer information to be referred to continues to be updated, whereas when the ending data table is read to the second control area 112, in the AT data table read to the first control area 111 A configuration may be adopted in which the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table is not updated regardless of whether or not the pointer information in the last order is the reference target. When the base effect for the ending period is executed, there is no return to the state in which the base effect for the AT state ST5 is executed until the current second section SC2 ends. By preventing the pointer information to be referenced from being updated in the AT data table, it is possible to prevent the update of the pointer information to be referenced from being wastefully executed.

Also, when the ending data table is read out to the second control area 112, the AT data table is erased from the first control area 111 by clearing the first control area 111 to "0" at that time. It may be configured to be Even in this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary updating of the pointer information to be referred to.

(8) When the add-on period data table is read out to the second control area 112, the pointer information of the last order in the AT data table read out to the first control area 111 is to be referred. The pointer information to be referenced continues to be updated until the pointer information in the last order is referenced, and a new update round is not started after the pointer information in the last order becomes the reference target. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the add-on period data table is read to the second control area 112, the pointer information to be referred to in the AT data table read to the first control area 111 is continuously updated. good too. In this case, when the pointer information of the last order in the AT data table becomes a reference target, a new update cycle is started after that.

(9) In addition lottery processing (step S3411), when an addition lottery is won, 1 is added to the value of the loop addition counter of the main side RAM 74, and 1 is added to the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5. There is no limitation to the configuration, and if an addition lottery process (step S3411) is won, the number of games to be added is a plurality of candidate games (for example, 1 game, 5 games, and 10 games). It is good also as a structure determined by lottery from among.

(10) If the occurrence lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery is won, the addition lottery process (step S3411) regardless of whether or not the addition lottery process (step S3411) wins the addition lottery. may be executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times). In this case, even if the addition lottery process (step S3411) does not win the addition lottery process, the addition lottery process (step S3411) is performed until the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed a plurality of times determined in advance. The execution situation will continue. In addition, in this configuration, when an addition lottery process (step S3411) is won, the value of the loop addition counter of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1, so that the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 is 1. It may be configured to be added, and in the case of an addition winning in the addition lottery process (step S3411), the number of games to be added is the number of a plurality of candidate games (for example, 1 game, 5 games, and 10 games). It is good also as a structure which is determined by lottery from inside.

(11) In addition lottery processing (step S3411), processing for determining by lottery whether the state in which the addition lottery processing (step S3411) is to be continued is not executed. The number of games to be played may be determined by lottery from a plurality of candidate numbers of games (eg, 1 game, 5 games, and 10 games). In this case, when the occurrence lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery is won, the addition lottery process (step S3411) is continued until the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed for the end reference number. The state of execution will continue.

(12) Additional effect indicating that the number of games corresponding to the number of winning additions in the addition lottery process (step S3411) of the loop lottery process (FIG. 62) is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5. is not limited to the configuration in which a new stop command for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R during rotation is issued. In addition to or in place of the generation of the command, the additional effect may be executed when the pressing operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for generating the stop command is released. Further, the above-described additional effect may be executed when the rotation acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed. It may be configured such that the additional effect is executed when the game is played, or the additional effect is executed when the game ends.

(13) Occurrence of Loop Lottery If a winning lottery process (step S3014) occurs, the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated. Although the configuration is such that the game ends within the scope of the winning game, it is not limited to this, and the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started. may continue over a plurality of games. In this case, in the second and subsequent games, the addition lottery process (step S3411) executed from the occurrence of the last notification opportunity in the previous game to the start of a new game based on the operation of the start lever 41. The number of games awarded based on the result may be notified when the new game is started.

In addition, the situation continues where the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated by winning in the generation lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery. In this case, the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated even during the period from the end of one game to the start of the next game. may be In this case, the number of games given based on the result of the addition lottery process (step S3411) executed until the next game is started is notified when the next game is started. good too.

In addition, the situation continues where the addition lottery process (step S3411) is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is activated by winning in the generation lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery. Even in this case, the addition lottery process (step S3411) may not be executed from the end of one game to the start of the next game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of remaining continuous games in the AT state ST5 from increasing when the game is not finished by the player.

(14) Loop Lottery Generating Lottery Processing (Step S3014) If a winning lottery is generated, the addition lottery processing (Step S3411) is executed once each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the addition lottery process (step S3411) may be executed a plurality of times each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started.

Further, when the generation lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery results in a winning lottery, the addition lottery process (step S3411) may be executed independently of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). In this case, the addition lottery process (step S3411) may be performed periodically, or the addition lottery process (step S3411) may be performed at irregular intervals.

(15) The AT state ST5 is not limited to the configuration in which it ends when the remaining number of continuous games becomes "0". The total number of game media awarded by the game executed in the state where the The total number of game media consumed for the purpose (the value obtained by subtracting "0" when the game is not running) is set, and when the remaining net increase number becomes "0", the AT state A configuration in which ST5 ends may be used. In this case, when the generation lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery results in a generation lottery win, the remaining net increase number is increased each time an addition lottery process (step S3411) results in an additional lottery win. Then, when the notification opportunity occurs, the remaining increment of the net increase in the number of sheets is notified.

Further, the AT state ST5 may be configured such that the number of game media to be provided is set as an end condition, and the AT state ST5 is terminated when the remaining number of provided game media becomes "0". In this case, when the occurrence lottery process (step S3014) of the loop lottery results in an occurrence lottery win, the additional lottery process (step S3411) increases the remaining number of tokens to be given each time an additional lottery win occurs. Then, when the notification opportunity occurs, the increase in the remaining number of sheets to be given is notified.

(16) In a game that is not the final game of the transition standby period (that is, the transition game to the pseudo-bonus state ST4), the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is a loss, and the middle→right→left or Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of middle→left→right, by setting the execution mode of the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the execution mode for avoidance, the "red 7 ' symbol, 'Red 7' symbol and 'Red 7' symbol combination and the combination of 'Red 7' symbol, 'Red 7' symbol and 'BAR' symbol may not be stop-displayed. As a result, even though it is not the final game of the transition waiting period, the combination of symbols suggesting a shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination is a loss is stopped and displayed. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

In addition, in a game that is not the final game of the transition waiting period (that is, the transition game to the pseudo-bonus state ST4), the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is winning with the index value IV=16. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the order of right→left or middle→left→right, the execution mode of the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is set to the execution mode for avoidance. , a combination of "Red 7", "Red 7" and "Red 7" and a combination of "Red 7", "Red 7" and "BAR" may not be stopped. . As a result, even though it is not the final game of the transition standby period, if the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is won with the index value IV=16, the pattern suggests transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is possible to prevent the combination of .

(17) In the situation where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is a big bonus, has been confirmed, the result of the winning lottery process (Fig. 16) in the final game of the transition waiting period is the index value IV = 16, which is either winning or losing. In this case, if the reel effect is executed after the symbol combination corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) is stopped and displayed, After the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in the reel performance, a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol) is displayed on the main line ML. , and then the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating again. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol) has been stop-displayed. Become.

(18) In the situation where the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which is a big bonus, is confirmed, the result of the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the winning combination in the final game of the transition waiting period is the index value IV = 16, winning or losing. Stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) to be stopped when When the order is notified, whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been stopped in accordance with the notified stop order and a combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (“Red 7” symbol, “Red 7 " symbol and "BAR" symbol combination) are stop-displayed or not, after that, the reel effect is executed and the symbol combination corresponding to the big bonus ("Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and A combination of "red 7" symbols) is stop-displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of “red 7” symbols, “red 7” symbols and “BAR” symbols) to be stopped is notified. On the condition that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been stopped in accordance with the notified stop order, reel effects are executed thereafter, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (" A combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol) may be stop-displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent reel effects from being executed for players who do not follow the notification of the stop order.

In addition, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which makes it possible to stop and display the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol), is reported. On the condition that the combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) is stopped and displayed in response to the above, the reel effect will be performed after that. A combination of symbols corresponding to the executed big bonus (combination of “red 7” symbol, “red 7” symbol and “red 7” symbol) may be stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a reel effect as a effect converted into a combination of symbols suggesting that an advantageous pseudo-bonus state ST4 is awarded.

(19) Combination of symbols corresponding to big bonus (combination of “red 7” symbol, “red 7” symbol and “red 7” symbol) or combination of symbols corresponding to regular bonus (“red 7” symbol, “red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol combination)) is configured to occur only in the final game of the transition standby period, but it is not limited to this, and during the transition standby period Even in the game of , if a win is made with index value IV=16 in the role lottery process (FIG. 16), or if a result is lost, a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (“Red 7” symbol, “ A notification that enables the stop display of a combination of "red 7" and "red 7" symbols) or a combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "BAR" symbols) may be configured to be executed. In this case, during the transition standby period, a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol) in the game before the final game or corresponding to the regular bonus When the combination of symbols (the combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) is stopped and displayed, the rest of the transition waiting period until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs. In the game, an effect may be executed indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed.

In addition, during the transition standby period, a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus in the game before the final game (combination of “red 7” symbol, “red 7” symbol and “red 7” symbol) or symbol corresponding to the regular bonus (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) has been notified that it is possible to stop display, but the combination of symbols cannot be stopped. may be configured such that the above-mentioned notification is executed again when winning with the index value IV=16 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the subsequent game during the transition standby period, or when the result is a loss. . As a result, a combination of symbols corresponding to the big bonus (a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7") or a combination of symbols corresponding to the regular bonus ("red 7", "red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol combination) can be stopped and displayed more frequently.

(20) If an irregular game occurs during the base effect for the additional period, the base effect for the ending period, the base effect for the main sign period, or the base effect for the fake sign period, the execution of these base effects is stopped and the effect corresponding to the irregular game is executed, but the updating of the pointer information of the data table for controlling the execution of the base effect may be continued. In this case, when the irregular game ends, progress of the base effect is resumed from the timing of the state in which the pointer update is continued while the irregular game is being executed.

(21) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effective line is only one main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the effective line is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of activated lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, or the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

(22) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media played may be transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the information on the number of game media to be provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding to that is sent to the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that medals are paid out when a small winning combination is won. If it is For example, it may be configured such that prizes other than medals are paid out when a minor win is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(24) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, a C-type, a combination of A and C types, a combination of B and C types, as well as RT games, CT games or AT machines. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with games. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a bonus state that is advantageous to the player.

(25) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may be geometric lines, figures, and the like. Also, it is possible to compose a pattern with light, color, etc., and a pattern can be configured with a three-dimensional shape, etc., or a composite of these can compose a pattern. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(26) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 was shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as game media. You may apply it to the game machine of the form which fused with the machine.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. When a predetermined target game (a game in which the number of bets is "3" in a non-CB state) is executed, a predetermined effect period (in the first to third embodiments, for an additional period effect execution means (upper lamp 61, speaker 62, image Display device 63) predetermined effect control means (in the first to third embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S3207, step S3208, step S3908, and step S3909 in the effect side MPU 92, and in the fourth embodiment, the effect a function of executing the processing of steps S4502, S4503, S4508 and S4509 in the side MPU 92;
If a predetermined non-target game (a game in which the bet number is "2", a game in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3) occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the predetermined effect period continues. Non-target correspondence control means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3705 to S3707 in the production side MPU 92, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S3801, and the processing of steps S3914 to S3916 Functions to be executed, in the second embodiment the function of executing the processing of steps S4005 to S4009 and steps S4102 to S4107 in the production side MPU 92, in the third embodiment the processing of steps S4205 to S4210 in the production side MPU 92 The function to execute, the function to execute the processing of steps S4216 to S4220 and the function to make an affirmative determination in step S4301, the processing of steps S4605 to S4608 and steps S4618 to S4621 in the production side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment functions to perform) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A1, a predetermined effect period that continues over a plurality of games can occur, so that it is possible to diversify the effects compared to a configuration in which only one-shot effects are executed in units of one game. becomes. In this case, if a non-target game occurs in a situation during the predetermined effect period, the predetermined effect period can be prevented from continuing. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect period from being continued even when a non-target game occurs in which it is not preferable to continue the predetermined effect period. Therefore, it is possible to suitably generate the predetermined performance period.

Feature A2. When the non-target game occurs during the predetermined effect period, the non-target response control means prevents the predetermined effect period from being continued, and controls the non-target response effect (notification during stop in the first embodiment, The effect executing means is controlled so as to execute the effect during irregularity in the second embodiment, the notification during stop and effect during irregularity in the third embodiment, and the effect during irregularity in the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by:

According to feature A2, when a non-target game occurs in a situation during the predetermined effect period, not only is the predetermined effect period not continued, but also the non-target corresponding effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined effect period cannot be continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game.

Feature A3. When the non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the non-target corresponding control means generates the non-target corresponding effect (second, third implementation The game machine according to feature A2, wherein the effect executing means is controlled so that an irregular effect in the form) is executed.

According to the feature A3, an effect corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period is executed as the non-target effect. As a result, it is possible to associate the execution details of the non-target effect with the progress of the predetermined effect period. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the non-target presentation is executed. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity when the non-target corresponding performance is executed instead of the situation where the predetermined performance period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game.

Feature A4. Correspondence information (irregular data table in the second embodiment) in which the content of the non-target corresponding effect is predetermined corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period is stored in the information storage means (effect-side ROM 93) in advance. is remembered,
When the non-target game occurs in the predetermined effect period, the non-target control means specifies the content of the non-target effect corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period from the correspondence information. , the game machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein the performance executing means is controlled so that the non-target corresponding performance of the specified content is executed.

According to the feature A4, the correspondence information in which the content of the non-target corresponding effect is predetermined corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period is stored in advance in the information storage means, and the non-target in the situation of the predetermined effect period. When a game occurs, the content of the non-target corresponding performance corresponding to the progress of the predetermined performance period is specified from the correspondence information, and the non-target corresponding performance of the specified content is executed. As a result, while reducing the processing load, it is possible to execute the non-target corresponding effect corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period.

Feature A5. A moving image corresponding to a predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means during the predetermined effect period,
When the non-target game occurs while the moving image corresponding to the predetermined effect is being displayed, the non-target corresponding control means provides a still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs during the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect. (In the first to third embodiments, the image displayed on the image display device 63 when the in-stop notification is being executed) is displayed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized by:

According to feature A5, when a non-target game occurs while a moving image corresponding to a predetermined effect is being displayed, a non-target game is generated using a still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect. A corresponding image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the progress of the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is stopped by using the still image displayed in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has occurred.

Feature A6. The non-target correspondence control means executes the effect as the image corresponding to the data after processing the data corresponding to the still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect as the non-target corresponding image. The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized in that it is displayed in the means.

According to feature A6, when a non-target game occurs while a moving image corresponding to a predetermined effect is being displayed, a still image corresponding to the timing at which the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed. Data is processed, and an image corresponding to the processed data is displayed as a non-target image. As a result, in a configuration in which a non-target image is displayed using a still image displayed in moving image display corresponding to a predetermined effect, the non-target corresponding image is the still image itself displayed in moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that the non-target image is displayed.

Feature A7. When the non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the non-target response control means provides a predetermined non-target response effect (irregular effect in the fourth embodiment) that does not correspond to the progress of the predetermined effect period. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the effect executing means is controlled so that a middle effect is executed.

According to feature A7, when a non-target game occurs in a situation during the predetermined effect period, a predetermined non-target corresponding effect that does not correspond to the progress of the predetermined effect period is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the information necessary for executing the non-target presentation, and to reduce the processing load.

Feature A8. When the predetermined effect period is not continuously executed due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the predetermined effect period, and the target game occurs, After the execution means for generating the predetermined effect period (function for executing the processing of steps S3709, S3710, S3918 and S3919 in the effect side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment the effect side MPU 92 The function of executing the processing of steps S4011 and S4012, the function of executing the processing of step S4212, step S4213, step S4222 and step S4223 in the production side MPU 92 in the third embodiment, the production side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S4610 to S4613.

According to feature A8, even if the predetermined effect period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the predetermined effect period is generated when the target game occurs after that. . As a result, even if a non-target game occurs in a situation in which the predetermined performance period occurs, it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance period from occurring as it is, and secure the opportunity for the predetermined performance period to occur. becomes possible.

Feature A9. The post-end execution means performs the predetermined effect when the non-target game occurs in the predetermined effect period and the predetermined effect period is not continued and the target game occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein progress of the predetermined performance period is resumed from the content of the timing stopped last time in the period.

According to the feature A9, even if the predetermined effect period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the predetermined effect period, if the target game occurs after that, the previous game is performed during the predetermined effect period. The progress of the predetermined effect period is restarted from the contents of the stopped timing. As a result, even if the non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period, when the target game occurs after that, it is possible for the player to confirm the contents of the continuation of the predetermined effect period.

Feature A10. The post-end execution means performs the predetermined effect when the non-target game occurs in the predetermined effect period and the predetermined effect period is not continued and the target game occurs. The gaming machine according to feature A8, characterized in that the period is newly started.

According to the feature A10, when the predetermined effect period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the target game occurs after that, and the predetermined effect period is renewed. be started. As a result, when a non-target game occurs, it is possible to provide the player with a new predetermined effect period with the subsequent occurrence of the target game as a trigger.

Feature A11. The non-objective control means is
If a first non-target game (a game in a non-CB state and the number of bets is "2") occurs as the non-target game in the predetermined effect period, the predetermined effect period is not continued, Means for controlling the production execution means so that the first non-target corresponding production (irregular medium production) is executed (function for executing the processing of steps S4216 to S4220 of the production side MPU 92 in the third embodiment) ,
When a second non-target game (a game in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3) occurs as the non-target game in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the predetermined effect period is prevented from continuing, and the second non-target game is generated. means for controlling the effect executing means so that the corresponding effect (notification during stop) is executed (the function of executing the processing of steps S4205 to S4207 of the effect side MPU 92 in the third embodiment);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A11, the predetermined effect period is not continued regardless of whether the first non-target game or the second non-target game occurs. The types of non-target corresponding effects to be executed are different between when the game occurs and when the second non-target game occurs. As a result, it is possible to execute the non-target effect in a mode corresponding to the type of the non-target game that has occurred.

Feature A12. The first non-target game is a game that can occur sporadically,
The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the second non-target game is a game that occurs consecutively.

According to the feature A12, it is possible to change the execution mode of the non-target correspondence effect between the case where the non-target game occurs sporadically and the case where the non-target game occurs continuously.

Feature A13. A moving image corresponding to a predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means during the predetermined effect period,
In one of the first non-target corresponding effect and the second non-target corresponding effect, an image using a still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means. It is a production that will be
Characteristic feature A11, wherein the other of the first non-target corresponding effect and the second non-target corresponding effect is a effect in which an image not using the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means. Or the gaming machine described in A12.

According to the characteristic A13, depending on whether or not an image using a still image displayed in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed, the non-target corresponding effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the type of the non-target game that has occurred. It becomes possible.

Feature A14. A game can be started when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set to bet,
the target game is a game in which a first predetermined number (“3”) of game media out of the predetermined number is bet set;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the non-target game is a game in which a second predetermined number (“2”) of game media out of the predetermined number is set to bet. .

According to feature A14, the predetermined effect period can be continued in the game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set, whereas in the game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet set, A state is reached in which the predetermined performance period is not continued. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet has occurred.

Feature A15. Characteristic A14 characterized in that a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set is more advantageous to the player than a game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet set. The game machine described.

According to feature A15, in the configuration in which the game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set is more advantageous to the player than the game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet set, In a game in which a predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the predetermined effect period can be continued, whereas in a game in which a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the predetermined effect period is not continued. Become. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a relatively disadvantageous second predetermined number of game media is set to bet has occurred.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A14 or A15, wherein the first predetermined number is greater than the second predetermined number.

According to feature A16, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a relatively small number of game media is set to bet has occurred.

Feature A17. The target game is a game executed in a game state other than the predetermined game state (first CB state ST2, second CB state ST3),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, wherein the non-target game is a game executed in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature A17, the predetermined effect period can be continued in the game executed in the game state that is not the predetermined game state, whereas the predetermined effect period is not continued in the game that is in the predetermined game state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the game in the predetermined game state has occurred.

For the configuration of features A1 to A17, any one of features A1 to A17, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D15, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F7, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. When a predetermined target game (a game in which the number of bets is "3" in a non-CB state) is executed, a predetermined effect period (the base effect for the additional period in the third embodiment) is performed over a plurality of games. and the base effect for the ending period) is generated. a function of executing the processes of steps S3208, S3908 and S3909;
When a predetermined non-target game (a game where the number of bets is "2", a game in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3) occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the effect content is the non-target A non-target game that differs between a case where a first non-target game (a game in which the number of bets is "2") occurs and a case where a second non-target game (a game in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3) occurs. Object correspondence control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4205 to S4210 of the production side MPU 92 in the third embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S4216 to S4220, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S4301); ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature B1, a predetermined effect period that continues over a plurality of games can occur, so that it is possible to diversify the effect compared to a configuration in which only a single effect is executed in units of one game. becomes. In this case, when the non-target game occurs in the predetermined effect period, the effect contents differ between the case where the first non-target game occurs as the non-target game and the case where the second non-target game occurs. obtain. As a result, when a non-target game occurs in a situation of a predetermined effect period, it is possible to make the effect content corresponding to it, and to make the effect content correspond to the type of the non-target game that has occurred. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to preferably execute the predetermined effect period.

Feature B2. The first non-target game is a game that can occur sporadically,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second non-target game is a game that occurs consecutively.

According to feature B2, the content of the effect in the case where the non-target game occurs in the predetermined effect period differs depending on whether the non-target game occurs singly or continuously. It will happen. As a result, it is possible to provide an appropriate effect content for the sporadic occurrence of the non-target game, and it is possible to provide an appropriate effect content for the continuous occurrence of the non-target game. It becomes possible.

Feature B3. The non-objective control means is
When the first non-target game (the game in the non-CB state and the number of bets is "2") occurs during the predetermined effect period, the first non-target corresponding effect (irregular effect) is executed. A means for controlling the production execution means so as to be performed (a function of executing the processing of steps S4216 to S4220 of the production side MPU 92 in the third embodiment),
When the second non-target game (the game in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3) occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period, the second non-target corresponding effect (stop notification) is executed. Means for controlling the effect execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S4205 to S4207 of the effect side MPU 92 in the third embodiment),
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B3, the type of non-target corresponding effect to be executed differs between the case where the first non-target game occurs and the case where the second non-target game occurs during the predetermined effect period. As a result, it is possible to execute the non-target effect in a mode corresponding to the type of the non-target game that has occurred.

Feature B4. A moving image corresponding to a predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means during the predetermined effect period,
In one of the first non-target corresponding effect and the second non-target corresponding effect, an image using a still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means. It is a production that will be
Characteristic B3 characterized in that the other of the first non-target corresponding effect and the second non-target corresponding effect is a effect in which an image not using the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature B4, depending on whether or not an image using a still image displayed in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed, the non-target corresponding effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the type of the non-target game that has occurred. It becomes possible.

Feature B5. A moving image corresponding to a predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means during the predetermined effect period,
The first non-target game is a game that can occur sporadically,
The second non-target game is a game that occurs consecutively,
The first non-target corresponding effect is a effect in which an image that does not use the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by the effect executing means,
The second non-target effect is an effect in which an image using a still image at the timing when the second non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed by the effect execution means. The gaming machine according to feature B3 or B4.

According to the feature B5, the effect content in the case where the non-target game occurs in the situation of the predetermined effect period differs depending on whether the non-target game occurs singly or continuously. It will happen. As a result, it is possible to provide an appropriate effect content for the sporadic occurrence of the non-target game, and it is possible to provide an appropriate effect content for the continuous occurrence of the non-target game. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the non-target game occurs sporadically, an image that does not use the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed, so that the display effect that is greatly different from the video display corresponding to the predetermined effect is displayed one time. can be generated spontaneously.

Further, when the non-target game occurs continuously, an image using a still image at the timing when the second non-target game occurs is displayed in the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect. As a result, even if the non-target game occurs continuously, the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect does not progress, but the image using the still image at the timing when the second non-target game occurs is displayed in the moving image display. Since it continues, it is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image display corresponding to the predetermined effect is in progress.

Feature B6. At least one of the first non-target corresponding effect and the second non-target corresponding effect is executed with content corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period at the timing when the corresponding non-target game occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B5.

According to the characteristic B6, an effect corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect period is executed as the non-object corresponding effect. As a result, it is possible to associate the execution details of the non-target effect with the progress of the predetermined effect period. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the non-target presentation is executed. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity when the non-target corresponding performance is executed instead of the situation where the predetermined performance period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game.

Feature B7. A game can be started when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set to bet,
The target game is a game in which a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet in a game state that is not a predetermined game state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3). ,
The first non-target game is a game in which a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is bet-set in a gaming state other than the predetermined gaming state;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the second non-target game is a game in the predetermined gaming state.

According to feature B7, a game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet in a gaming state that is not the predetermined gaming state and a game that is in the predetermined gaming state are treated as non-target games, and a game in the gaming state that is not the predetermined gaming state is treated as a non-target game. A game in which a predetermined number of game media is betted is treated as a target game. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which the second predetermined number of game media is betted or a game in the predetermined game state has occurred in a game state that is not the predetermined game state.

Feature B8. A game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet-set in a game state that is not the predetermined game state is a game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet-set in the game state that is not the predetermined game state. The gaming machine of feature B7, wherein the gaming machine is more advantageous to the player than the game in which the game is played.

According to feature B8, the game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet-set in the gaming state that is not the predetermined gaming state is the game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet-set in the gaming state that is not the predetermined gaming state. A game in which a first predetermined number of game media is bet-set in a game state that is not the predetermined game state is treated as a target game, and a game state that is not the predetermined game state is treated as a target game. A game in which a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet is treated as a non-target game. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a relatively disadvantageous second predetermined number of game media is set to bet has occurred.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B7 or B8, wherein the first predetermined number is greater than the second predetermined number.

According to feature B9, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a relatively small number of game media is set to bet has occurred.

For the configuration of features B1 to B9, any one of features A1 to A17, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D15, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F7, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Effect executing means (upper lamp 61, speaker 62, image display device) so that a predetermined effect period (base effect for the main precursor period and base effect for the fake precursor period in the fourth embodiment) occurs over a plurality of games 63) (the function of executing the processing of step S4502, step S4503, step S4508 and step S4509 of the effect side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment),
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established in the situation of the predetermined effect period (the game with the number of bets of "2", the game in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), the predetermined effect period being executed is interrupted. Midway termination means for ending with (function for executing the processing of steps S4605 and S4618 of the effect side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C1, a predetermined effect period that continues over a plurality of games can occur, which makes it possible to diversify the effects compared to a configuration in which only one-shot effects are executed in units of one game. becomes. In this case, the predetermined effect period being executed is terminated in the middle based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in the situation of the predetermined effect period. Thus, it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance period from being continued even when a predetermined condition is satisfied in which it is not preferable to continue the predetermined performance period. Further, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect period is not temporarily stopped in the middle, but the predetermined effect period is ended in the middle. will start anew. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand the effect content of the effect to be executed after the state in which the predetermined condition is established is cancelled.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined non-target game occurs in the predetermined effect period.

According to the feature C2, when a non-target game occurs during the predetermined effect period, the predetermined effect period is terminated in the middle. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect period from being continued even when a non-target game in which it is not preferable to continue the predetermined effect period occurs. In addition, when the non-target game occurs, the predetermined effect period is not temporarily stopped in the middle, but the predetermined effect period is ended in the middle, so the effect is renewed after the non-target game ends. be started. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect content of the effect executed after the non-target game is finished easy for the player to understand.

Feature C3. The predetermined effect control means is a start control means (step S4611 of the effect side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment) for newly starting the predetermined effect period based on the cancellation of the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied. and a function of executing the processing of step S4612).

According to feature C3, when the predetermined effect period is terminated in the middle due to the fulfillment of a predetermined condition in a situation in which the predetermined effect period is being executed, and then the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is cancelled. , a predetermined performance period is newly started. As a result, when the state in which the predetermined condition is established is canceled, it is possible to provide the player with a new predetermined performance period.

Feature C4. When the start control means newly starts the predetermined effect period based on the cancellation of the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the start control means controls the number of games to be executed for the remainder of the predetermined effect period. The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized in that a predetermined performance period to be started is performed.

According to the feature C4, when the predetermined effect period is newly started by canceling the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game is newly started over the remaining number of execution games in the predetermined effect period. Since the predetermined effect period is executed, it is possible to prevent the period, which is the predetermined effect period, from becoming excessively long.

Feature C5. The start control means is
A content determining means (a production side in the fourth embodiment) that determines the content of the performance of the predetermined performance period corresponding to the number of remaining games to be played in the predetermined performance period when the state in which the predetermined condition is established is canceled. A function of executing the processing of step S4611 of the MPU 92);
Means for generating the predetermined effect period according to the effect content determined by the content determination means (function for executing the process of step S4612 of the effect side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature C3 or C4, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C5, when the predetermined effect period is newly started by canceling the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game is newly started over the remaining number of execution games in the predetermined effect period. Since the predetermined effect period is executed, it is possible to prevent the period, which is the predetermined effect period, from becoming excessively long. In addition, since the newly started predetermined effect period has effect contents corresponding to the remaining number of execution games in the predetermined effect period, the effect contents of the newly started predetermined effect period are changed to the remaining number of executed games. It is possible to make the content of the production suitable for.

Feature C6. The predetermined effect control means is
an initial determination means (a function of executing the process of step S4502 of the effect-side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment) that determines the effect content of the predetermined effect period corresponding to the initial number of games based on the occurrence of the effect start opportunity; ,
A means for generating the predetermined effect period according to the effect content determined by the initial determination means (a function of executing the process of step S4503 of the effect side MPU 92 in the fourth embodiment);
The gaming machine according to feature C4 or C5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C6, the effect contents of the predetermined effect period corresponding to the initial number of games are determined based on the occurrence of the effect start opportunity, and the predetermined effect period is executed according to the determined effect contents. As a result, it is possible to make the effect content of the predetermined effect period started based on the occurrence of the effect start opportunity to match the initial number of games. In this case, if a predetermined condition is satisfied while the predetermined effect period is being executed, the predetermined effect period ends in the middle. The newly started predetermined effect period is executed over the remaining execution game number of the effect period. This makes it possible to keep the total number of games in the predetermined effect period between the fulfillment of the predetermined condition within the range of the initial number of games.

Feature C7. A configuration in which the predetermined condition is established when a predetermined non-target game occurs in a situation where the predetermined effect period is being executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C6, wherein even if the non-target game is executed, the number of remaining games to be executed in the predetermined effect period is not decreased.

According to the characteristic C7, the predetermined effect period is terminated in the middle due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the predetermined effect period, and when the non-target game ends, the predetermined effect period is newly started. In the configuration, even if the non-target game is executed, the number of remaining execution games in the predetermined effect period does not decrease, so that the total number of games in the predetermined effect period does not decrease due to the occurrence of the non-target game. It becomes possible.

Feature C8. As the predetermined effect period, there are a first predetermined effect period (base effect for the main precursor period in the fourth embodiment) and a second predetermined effect period (base effect for the false precursor period in the fourth embodiment). and
When the first predetermined effect period being executed ends in the middle based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the situation of the first predetermined effect period, the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is cancelled. A configuration in which the first predetermined effect period occurs based on,
When the second predetermined effect period being executed ends in the middle based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied in the situation of the second predetermined effect period, it is assumed that the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is cancelled. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the second predetermined effect period does not occur.

According to feature C8, even if the first predetermined effect period ends based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the first predetermined effect period is generated based on the cancellation of the state in which the predetermined condition is established. On the other hand, when the second predetermined performance period ends based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the second predetermined performance period does not occur even if the state in which the predetermined condition is established is canceled. As a result, it is possible to vary the mode of execution of the effect after the state in which the predetermined condition is established is canceled according to the type of the predetermined effect period.

Feature C9. The first predetermined effect period is a effect that is executed when a profit (additional period) is given to the player after that,
The gaming machine according to feature C8, wherein the second predetermined effect period is an effect that is executed when the profit is not given to the player after that.

According to the feature C9, even if the first predetermined performance period in which the player is subsequently awarded the profit is terminated due to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition in the middle, the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is canceled. It is executed by being As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the sense of expectation for the provision of profits. On the other hand, when the second predetermined performance period executed when no profit is given to the player after that is terminated due to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition on the way, the state in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is cancelled. It won't run even if you do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the situation where the profit is not given to the player after all even though the second predetermined effect period is executed again.

For the configuration of features C1 to C9, any one of features A1 to A17, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D15, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F7, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A specific effect period (base effect for the ending period) occurs over a plurality of games when a predetermined target game (a game in which the number of bets is "3" in a non-CB state) is executed. Specific effect control means for controlling the effect execution means (upper lamp 61, speaker 62, image display device 63) (function of executing the processing of step S3908 and step S3909 in the effect side MPU92),
When a predetermined non-target game (a game with a bet number of "2", a game in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3) occurs in the situation of the specific effect period, the specific effect As a period, a first specific effect period (a base effect for the ending period triggered by the first ending flag on the effect side in the effect-side RAM 94 being set to "1") and a second specific effect Specific correspondence control means (effect side A function of executing the processing of steps S3911 to S3916 in the MPU 92);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, a specific effect period that continues over a plurality of games can occur, making it possible to diversify the effects compared to a configuration in which only one-time effects are executed in units of one game. becomes. In this case, when the non-target game occurs in the specific effect period, the effect contents are the first specific effect period as the specific effect period and the second specific effect period. can differ in As a result, it is possible to make the content of the effect when the non-target game occurs correspond to the type of the occurring specific effect period. Therefore, it is possible to favorably generate the specific effect period.

Feature D2. Even if the non-target game occurs in the situation of the first specific effect period, the first specific effect period is continued,
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific correspondence control means prevents the second specific effect period from being continued when the non-target game occurs in the situation of the second specific effect period. .

According to feature D2, depending on the type of specific effect period that is occurring, the specific effect period continues as it is when the non-target game occurs, and the specific effect period continues when the non-target game occurs. It is possible to create a situation where the

Feature D3. The specific effect control means is
Means for generating the first specific effect period (the effect A function of executing the processing of steps S3908 and S3909 triggered by the fact that the first ending flag on the side is set to "1");
Means for generating the second specific effect period based on the occurrence of the second specific start opportunity (the second ending flag on the effect side in the effect-side RAM 94 is set to "1") (the effect in the effect-side MPU 92) A function of executing the processing of steps S3908 and S3909 triggered by the fact that the second ending flag on the side is set to "1");
and
The specific response control means generates the first specific start opportunity when the second specific effect period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the second specific effect period. In this case, the gaming machine according to feature D2 is characterized in that the second specific effect period is continued even when the non-target game is occurring.

According to feature D3, the first specific start opportunity occurs even when the second specific effect period is prevented from being continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the second specific effect period. In this case, the second specific effect period is continued even if the non-target game is occurring. Thereby, even in the situation of the second specific effect period, when the first specific start opportunity occurs, the non-target game can be handled in the same way as the situation of the first specific effect period.

Feature D4. Advantageous termination means (a function of executing the processing of step S1914 in the main side MPU 72) for terminating the advantageous gaming situation based on the establishment of the advantageous ending condition in the advantageous gaming situation (second section SC2),
Any one of the characteristics D1 to D3, wherein the specific effect control means starts the specific effect period based on a pre-terminating situation (ending period) before the advantageous end condition is established. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature D4, it is possible to generate a specific effect period in a pre-termination situation before the advantageous termination condition is established. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature D1, it is possible to make the content of the effect when the non-target game occurs correspond to the type of the specific effect period occurring. Therefore, it is possible to make the execution mode of the effect in the pre-end situation suitable.

Feature D5. The advantageous end condition is established based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming situation reaches the upper limit number of games,
From the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the advantageous game situation continues, to the total number of game media consumed to execute the game while the advantageous game situation continues is set as a predetermined difference number (total net increase in number of game media with restrictions), the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as a predetermined reference value, and the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value is The advantageous end condition is established based on reaching the upper limit difference number,
As the pre-end situation, a first pre-end situation (a situation where the first ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1") occurs before the favorable end condition is established by reaching the upper limit number of games. ), and a second pre-end situation (a situation where the second ending flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1") that occurs before the favorable end condition is established by reaching the upper limit difference number. exists and
The specific effect control means starts the first specific effect period based on the first pre-end situation, and starts the second specific effect period based on the second pre-end situation. The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized by being started.

According to feature D5, since the advantageous game situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous game situation reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous game situation is prevented from continuing for an excessively long time. becomes possible. In addition, since the advantageous game situation ends when the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous game situation reaches the upper limit difference number, the advantageous game situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to In this case, the first specified effect period is started based on the first pre-end situation, the second specified effect period is started based on the second pre-end situation, and the first pre-end situation is started. The contents of the effect when the non-target game is executed are different between the specific effect period and the second specific effect period. As a result, it is possible to make the contents of the effect when the non-target game occurs correspond to the contents of the trigger of the pre-end situation.

Feature D6. When the non-target game occurs in the advantageous gaming situation, the non-target game is also included in the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming situation, and the predetermined difference number is reduced,
Even if the non-target game occurs in the situation of the first specific effect period, the first specific effect period is continued,
The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the specific response control means prevents the second specific effect period from being continued when the non-target game occurs in a situation of the second specific effect period. .

According to feature D6, when a non-target game occurs in an advantageous game situation, the non-target game is also included in the number of games executed in the advantageous game situation, and the predetermined difference is reduced. As a result, when a non-target game occurs, it is possible to approach the upper limit number of games while moving away from the upper limit difference number. In this case, in the case of the first specific effect period occurring due to the first pre-end situation before the maximum number of games is reached, the first specific effect period will not last even if a non-target game occurs. Continued. As a result, when the end of the advantageous game situation is approaching due to the occurrence of the non-target game, it is possible to advance the specific effect period accordingly. On the other hand, in the case of the second specific effect period occurring due to the second pre-end situation that is before reaching the upper limit difference number, the second specific effect period is generated with respect to the occurrence of the non-target game. discontinued. As a result, it is possible to stop the progress of the specific effect period when the occurrence of the non-target game moves away from the end of the advantageous game situation.

Feature D7. When the non-target game occurs in the second specific effect period, the specific response control means prevents the second specific effect period from being continued, and controls the non-target response effect (stop in the first embodiment). The game machine according to feature D3 or D6, wherein the effect executing means is controlled so that medium notification) is executed.

According to the feature D7, when a non-target game occurs in the specific effect period, not only is the specific effect period not continued, but also the non-target corresponding effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the specific effect period will not be continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game.

Feature D8. The specific response control means, when the non-target game occurs in the situation of the second specific effect period, the non-target corresponding effect (first implementation The game machine according to feature D7, wherein the effect execution means is controlled so that the stop notification in the form) is executed.

According to feature D8, an effect corresponding to the progress of the second specific effect period is executed as the non-target effect. As a result, it is possible to associate the execution content of the non-target effect with the progress content of the second specific effect period. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the non-target presentation is executed. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity when the non-target corresponding performance is executed instead of the situation where the second specific performance period is not continuously executed due to the occurrence of the non-target game. Become.

Feature D9. A moving image display corresponding to a second specific effect is performed by the effect executing means as the second specific effect period,
When the non-target game occurs while the video display corresponding to the second specific effect is being performed, the specific response control means controls the timing at which the non-target game occurs in the video display corresponding to the second specific effect. (image displayed on the image display device 63 when the in-stop notification in the first embodiment is being executed) using the still image is displayed in the effect execution means as the non-target effect. The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, characterized in that

According to feature D9, when a non-target game occurs while a moving image corresponding to the second specific effect is displayed, a still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the second specific effect is displayed. The non-target image used is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the progress of the moving image display corresponding to the second specific effect is stopped by using the still image displayed in the moving image display corresponding to the second specific effect. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player recognize that a non-target game has occurred.

Feature D10. The specific correspondence control means is configured such that, in moving image display corresponding to the second specific effect, the image corresponding to the processed data corresponding to the still image at the timing when the non-target game occurs is the non-target corresponding image as the non-target corresponding image. The gaming machine according to feature D9, characterized in that it is displayed in the execution means.

According to feature D10, when a non-target game occurs in a situation where a moving image corresponding to the second specific effect is being displayed, the player stops at the timing when the non-target game occurs in the moving image display corresponding to the second specific effect. Data corresponding to the image is processed, and the image corresponding to the processed data is displayed as the non-target image. Thus, in the configuration in which the non-target image is displayed using the still image displayed in the moving image display corresponding to the second specific effect, the non-target corresponding image is displayed in the moving image display corresponding to the second specific effect. Since it is not the still image itself, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the non-target corresponding image is being displayed.

Feature D11. When the second specific effect period is not continued due to the occurrence of the non-target game in the situation of the second specific effect period and the target game occurs , post-end execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S3918 and S3919 in the MPU 92 on the production side) for resuming the progress of the second specific effect period from the content of the timing stopped last time in the second specific effect period. The game machine according to any one of features D3, D6 to D10, characterized in that

According to the feature D11, even if the non-target game occurs during the second specified effect period and the second specified effect period is not continued, if the target game occurs after that, the second specified effect period is not continued. The progress of the second specific effect period is restarted from the content of the timing stopped last time in the second specific effect period. As a result, even if the non-target game occurs in the second specific effect period, if the target game occurs after that, the player can confirm the contents of the continuation of the second specific effect period. Become.

Feature D12. A game can be started when a predetermined number (“2” or “3”) of game media is set to bet,
the target game is a game in which a first predetermined number (“3”) of game media out of the predetermined number is bet set;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11, wherein the non-target game is a game in which a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet. .

According to feature D12, the execution mode of the effect can change in the game in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet has occurred.

Feature D13. Characteristic D12 characterized in that a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set is more advantageous to the player than a game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet set. The game machine described.

According to feature D13, in the configuration in which the game in which the first predetermined number of game media is bet set is more advantageous to the player than the game in which the second predetermined number of game media is bet set, the second In a game in which a predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the mode of execution of effects may change. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a relatively disadvantageous second predetermined number of game media is set to bet has occurred.

Feature D14. The gaming machine according to feature D12 or D13, wherein the first predetermined number is greater than the second predetermined number.

According to feature D14, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a game in which a relatively small number of game media is set to bet has occurred.

Feature D15. The target game is a game executed in a game state other than the predetermined game state (first CB state ST2, second CB state ST3),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D14, wherein the non-target game is a game executed in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature D15, when a game in a predetermined game state occurs, the execution mode of the effect can change. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the game in the predetermined game state has occurred.

For the configuration of features D1 to D15, any one of features A1 to A17, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D15, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F7, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A predetermined storage means (production side ROM 93) that stores in advance a plurality of production control data tables (AT data table group 101, additional period data table group 102),
Specific storage means (rendering side RAM 94) from which the performance control data table is read,
Production control means (function for executing task processing (FIG. 60) in production side MPU 92) for performing control of production according to the production control data table read out to the specific storage means;
with
The effect control data table includes a plurality of reference information (pointer information) and control information (a combination of image data, sound data, and light emission data) that is set in association with each reference information and defines the content of execution control of the effect. ), and
The production control means is
Updating means (step S3301 in the effect side MPU 92) for updating the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table read out to the specific storage means to the reference information in the next order when an update opportunity occurs ~ a function to execute the processing of step S3315);
Control execution means (effect side MPU 92 a function to execute the processing of steps S3316 to S3320 in
with
Even if the effect control data table is read out to a predetermined storage area (first control area 111) of the specific storage means, the effect control means can be stored in a predetermined state (second control area 112 for an additional period). When the data table is read out), it is a configuration that does not perform execution control of the production according to the production control data table,
The update means, when the effect control data table is read in the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means, in the effect control data table when the update opportunity occurs even in the predetermined state A game machine characterized by comprising a predetermined updating means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3308 to S3310 in the production side MPU 92) for updating the reference information to be referred to to the next reference information.

According to the feature E1, the performance execution control is performed by using the performance control data table having a plurality of reference information and control information set corresponding to each reference information. can be performed according to a predetermined control pattern.

In this case, even if the effect control data table is read out to the predetermined storage area, the effect execution control according to the effect control data table is not performed in a predetermined state. As a result, even when the effect control data table is read out to the predetermined storage area, it is possible to create a situation in which the effect execution control according to the effect control data table is not performed.

On the other hand, even in a situation where the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out to the predetermined storage area is not performed due to the predetermined state, the reference to be referred to in the effect control data table. Information updates will continue. As a result, when the predetermined state ends, it is possible to restart the execution control of the performance according to the performance control data table read out in the predetermined storage area from the content that has progressed for the period of time during which the predetermined state continues. becomes.

Feature E2. The performance control means stores the performance control data table in the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means from the situation in which the performance control data table is read out to the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means and is in the predetermined state. In the situation where the performance control data table is read and the situation is not the predetermined state, the performance control data table read into the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means becomes a reference target. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the control information corresponding to the reference information stored in the game machine is used to control the execution of the presentation.

According to the feature E2, even in a situation where the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out to the predetermined storage area is not performed due to the predetermined state, the object to be referred to in the effect control data table The update of the reference information that becomes is continued. Then, when a situation other than the predetermined state occurs in the situation, the control information corresponding to the reference information to be referred to in the performance control data table read out to the predetermined storage area is used to produce the effect. execution control is performed. Thereby, when the predetermined state ends, it is possible to restart the execution control of the performance according to the performance control data table read out to the predetermined storage area from the content advanced for the period during which the predetermined state continues. becomes.

Feature E3. The updating means updates the last reference information in the effect control data table in a situation where the effect control data table is read into the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means and is not in the predetermined state. is a reference target, when the update opportunity occurs, the reference information of the first order in the effect control data table is set as the reference target, and a new cycle of updating the reference information to be the reference target is started. and
The predetermined update means is a condition in which the effect control data table is read into the predetermined storage area of the specific storage means, and in a situation in which the effect control data table is in the predetermined state, the reference is made to the effect control data table. Based on the fact that the information has become the reference information of the last order in the performance control data table, even if the update opportunity occurs after that in the situation of the predetermined state, the reference information to be referred to is updated. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, characterized in that the update stop state (state in which "1" is set in the update standby flag of the effect-side RAM 94) does not start a new round.

According to feature E3, the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table is updated in a predetermined state in which the effect execution control according to the effect control data table read out to the predetermined storage area is not performed. is continued, but when the reference information to be referred to becomes the reference information in the last order, a new cycle of updating the reference information to be referred to is not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reference information to be referred to in the performance control data table read out to the predetermined storage area from being continuously updated in a situation where the predetermined state continues for a long time.

Feature E4. When the update stop state is no longer in the predetermined state, the update means refers to the reference information of the first order in the effect control data table read out to the predetermined storage area as the reference information. The gaming machine according to feature E3, characterized in that it starts a new round of updating of.

According to the feature E4, when the update cycle of the reference information to be referred to the effect control data table in the predetermined storage area when the predetermined state is started ends in the middle of the predetermined state, the predetermined state is executed after that. When finished, updating of the reference information to be referenced in the effect control data table in the predetermined storage area is started from the reference information in the first order. As a result, even if the execution content of the effect that is started when the predetermined state ends does not chronologically correspond to the execution content of the effect before the start of the predetermined state, the effect is executed from the first execution timing. It is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started, thereby making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Feature E5. The specific storage means includes the predetermined storage area and a specific storage area (second control area 112) as storage areas from which the effect control data table is read out individually,
The predetermined state is a state in which the effect control data table is read out to each of the predetermined storage area and the specific storage area,
When the effect control data table is read out to each of the predetermined storage area and the specific storage area, the effect control means executes the effect according to the effect control data table read out to the specific storage area. While performing control, it is a configuration that does not perform execution control of production according to the production control data table read out in the predetermined storage area,
Said predetermined update means, when said effect control data table is read to each of said predetermined storage area and said specific storage area, said that is read to said predetermined storage area when said update opportunity occurs The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the reference information to be referred to in the performance control data table is updated to the reference information in the next order.

According to feature E5, not only a predetermined storage area but also a specific storage area is provided as a storage area from which the effect control data tables are read out individually, so that a plurality of effect control data tables can be simultaneously read out. It is possible to generate

Further, when the effect control data table is read to each of the predetermined storage area and the specific storage area, the effect execution control is performed according to the effect control data table read to the specific storage area, while the predetermined storage area Execution control of the performance according to the performance control data table read out is not performed. As a result, it is possible to set the specific storage area as a storage area to be executed for performance execution control to be prioritized over the predetermined storage area, and a state in which a plurality of performance control data tables are read out simultaneously can be realized. It is possible to reduce the processing load for specifying the side to be given priority as the execution target of performance execution control in a configuration that allows generation.

In this case, even in a situation where the performance execution control according to the performance control data table read out to the predetermined storage area is not performed, the reference information to be referred to in the performance control data table is continuously updated. be done. As a result, when the performance control data table is not read out to the specific storage area, the execution control of the performance is performed according to the performance control data table read out to the specific storage area. From the contents, it is possible to restart the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area.

Feature E6. The effect control means determines whether the effect control data table has been read into the predetermined storage area from the situation in which the effect control data table has been read into the predetermined storage area and the specific storage area. When the performance control data table is not read out to the storage area, the control corresponding to the reference information that is the reference target in the performance control data table that is read out to the predetermined storage area. The game machine according to feature E5, characterized in that execution control of the presentation is performed using the information for the game.

According to the feature E6, even in a situation where the performance execution control according to the performance control data table read out to the predetermined storage area is not performed, the reference information to be referred to in the performance control data table is updated. is continued. Then, when the effect control data table is not read to the specific storage area in the situation, the reference information that is the reference target in the effect control data table that is read to the predetermined storage area. Execution control of the production is performed using the corresponding control information. As a result, when the performance control data table is not read out to the specific storage area, the performance execution control is advanced according to the performance control data table read out to the specific storage area by the period during which the performance is controlled. From the contents, it is possible to restart the execution control of the effect according to the effect control data table read out in the predetermined storage area.

Feature E7. The updating means, in a situation in which the effect control data table is read in the predetermined storage area and in a situation in which the effect control data table is not read in the specific storage area, is the last in the effect control data table. When the update opportunity occurs in a situation where the reference information in the order of is the reference target, the reference information in the first order in the production control data table is used as the reference target, and the reference information to be the reference target is updated. is to start a new cycle of
The predetermined updating means reads the performance control data table into the predetermined storage area in a situation where the performance control data table is read into the specific storage area. Even if the update opportunity occurs after that based on the reference information to be referred to in the produced effect control data table becoming the reference information of the last order in the effect control data table, An update stop state that does not start a new round of updating the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table read out to the predetermined storage area (the update standby flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1") The gaming machine according to feature E5 or E6, characterized in that the game machine is

According to the feature E7, the reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table is continuously updated in a situation where the effect execution control according to the effect control data table read out to the predetermined storage area is not performed. However, when the reference information to be referred to becomes the reference information in the last order, a new cycle of updating the reference information to be referred to is not started. Thus, in a situation where the performance execution control according to the performance control data table read out to the specific storage area continues for a long time, the reference to the performance control data table read out to the predetermined storage area is performed. It is possible to prevent information from being continuously updated.

Feature E8. When the updating means is in the update stop state and the effect control data table is not read into the specific storage area, the effect control data table is read into the predetermined storage area. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the reference information in the first order in the above is set as a reference target, and a new cycle of updating the reference information is started.

According to the feature E8, the update cycle of the reference information to be referred to the effect control data table in the predetermined storage area at the timing when the effect control data table is read in the specific storage area is stored in the effect control data table in the specific storage area. If the execution control of the effect according to this is terminated in the middle, and if the effect control data table is not read out to the specific storage area after that, the reference information in the first order will be read from the predetermined storage area. Updating of reference information to be referred to in the effect control data table is started. As a result, the execution contents of the effect that is started when the effect control data table is not read out to the specific storage area are different from the execution contents of the effect before the effect control data table is read out to the specific storage area. Even if they do not correspond to each other in chronological order, the player can be made to recognize that the performance has started from the first execution timing, and the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable.

For the configuration of features E1 to E8, any one of features A1 to A17, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D15, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F7, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the features of the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, and the feature group E, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a game machine such as the one illustrated above, it is necessary to suitably execute an effect, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Advantageous transition means for shifting to an advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) advantageous to the player (function for executing the processing of steps S2906 and S2907 in the main side MPU 72);
Means (step in the main MPU 72) for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the remaining continuation reference number (number of remaining continuation games in the AT state ST5) in the advantageous gaming state becomes "0" with the execution of the game A function to execute the processing of S3111 to S3119);
Lottery end opportunity (additional lottery processing (step S3411) does not win addition lottery processing (step S3411)) Each time a lottery execution opportunity occurs (every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started), the remaining continuation reference number is increased until the number of executions of step S3411) reaches the end reference number). increase lottery processing (step S3411), which is at least one of lottery processing for determining whether or not to increase the continuation reference number and lottery processing for determining the value by which the remaining continuation reference number is to be increased (step S3411). function to execute the processing of S3411);
Based on the occurrence of a notification opportunity (a stop command to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) in a situation where the lottery end opportunity in the grant target game has not occurred, it is executed until the notification opportunity occurs. Predetermined notification means for notifying the increase in the remaining continuation reference number based on the result of the increase lottery process (function for executing the processing of steps S3606 to S3608 in the production side MPU 92);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F1, when the game becomes a grant target game, the additional lottery process is executed each time a lottery execution opportunity occurs until a lottery end opportunity occurs. In the increase lottery process, at least one of whether or not to increase the remaining continuation reference number of the advantageous gaming state and a value for increasing the remaining continuation reference number of the advantageous gaming state is determined. As a result, the player expects to be the grant target game, and expects that a larger continuation reference number will be granted in the grant target game.

In addition, even if the opportunity to end the lottery in the grant target game does not occur, if the notification opportunity occurs, the increase in the continuation reference number due to the increased lottery process executed until the notification opportunity occurs is notified. be done. As a result, it becomes possible to provide many opportunities to notify that the continuation reference number has been provided within the range of the award target game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein a plurality of types of notification triggers are present in the grant target game.

According to feature F2, since there are a plurality of types of notification opportunities in the grant target game, it is possible to increase the number of opportunities to be notified that the continuation reference number has been granted within the scope of the grant target game.

Feature F3. When the first notification opportunity occurs in the grant target game, the predetermined notification means is configured based on the increase lottery process executed from the start of the grant target game until the first notification opportunity occurs. When the increment of the remaining continuation reference number is notified, and the second or later notification opportunity occurs in the grant target game, the notification opportunity is executed from the previous occurrence to the current occurrence of the notification opportunity. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein an increase in the remaining continuation reference number based on the increasing lottery process is notified.

According to feature F3, in a configuration in which the notification opportunity can occur multiple times in the grant target game, the increment of the continuation reference number notified at each notification opportunity is the same as the increment of the continuation reference number notified at other notification opportunities. It is possible to avoid duplication.

Feature F4. Determination means for determining whether the game is to be the grant target game when the game is started (function for executing the process of step S3014 in the main side MPU 72);
Means (function of executing the process of step S3016 in the main side MPU 72) for giving the corresponding number (10 games) at the time of decision to the remaining continuation reference number when the decision means decides to set it as the game to be awarded )When,
Means for notifying that the corresponding number at the time of determination has been granted when the deciding means determines to be the game to be awarded (function for executing the processing of steps S3602 to S3604 in the production side MPU 92); ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F4, when it is determined that the grant target game will occur, the determination time correspondence number is added to the remaining continuation reference number of the advantageous gaming state, and the given determination time correspondence number is notified. be. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of the occurrence of the award target game, and to increase the player's attention to the award target game.

Feature F5. pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display areas for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet; ,
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the plurality of variable display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display areas;
When the game is executed, the variable display of the pattern is started, and based on the operation of the stop operation means, the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped. A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so as to
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing the processes of steps S309 and S310 in the main MPU 72);
with
Any of the characteristics F1 to F4, wherein the notification opportunity is generated each time the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature F5, every time the player operates the stop operation means in the award target game, the increment of the continuation reference number based on the increasing lottery process executed so far is notified. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player to the operation of the stop operation means.

Feature F6. The game machine according to any one of the features F1 to F5, wherein the lottery ending trigger occurs within one game.

According to the feature F6, since the lottery ending trigger occurs within the range of one game, it is possible to prevent excessive profit from being awarded.

Feature F7. Specific processing execution means (function for executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 72) for executing specific processing (timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11)) each time a specific period elapses,
The specific period is set so that the specific process is executed many times in the grant target game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the increasing lottery process is executed in the specific process.

According to the feature F7, it is possible to perform the increase lottery process many times in the award target game.

For the configuration of features F1 to F7, any one of features A1 to A17, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D15, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F7, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display areas for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet; ,
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the plurality of variable display areas and operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the corresponding variable display areas;
When the game is executed, the variable display of the pattern is started, and based on the operation of the stop operation means, the variable display of the pattern in the variable display area corresponding to the stop operation means is stopped. A pattern display control means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main side MPU 72) that controls the pattern display means so as to
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing the processes of steps S309 and S310 in the main MPU 72);
with
The pattern display control means causes the stop operation means to operate in a first stop mode (middle→left→right) when the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is a predetermined corresponding result (won at index value IV=16). It is possible to display a first stop result (a stop result including a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols) based on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. When the result is the predetermined correspondence result, the second stop result ("red 7" pattern, "red 7") is generated based on the operation of the stop operation means in the second stop mode (middle → right → left). a stop result, including a combination of symbols and "BAR" symbols, can be displayed;
As game states advantageous to the player, a first advantageous game state (big bonus) and a second advantageous game state (regular bonus) are set.
This game machine is
When the result of the lottery process of the combination becomes the predetermined correspondence result in the situation where it is decided to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop mode. A first predetermined notification (display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R) that the player can recognize is executed. First predetermined notification control means (function to execute the processing of steps S2514 and S2515 in the main side MPU 72, function to execute the processing of step S2605 in the effect side MPU 92),
If the result of the lottery process for the combination is the predetermined correspondence result in the situation where it is determined to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, the stop operation means should be operated in the second stop mode. A second predetermined notification (display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L) that the player can recognize is executed. Second predetermined notification control means (function to execute the processing of steps S2516 and S2517 in the main side MPU72, function to execute the processing of step S2602 in the effect side MPU92),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, when the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is the predetermined corresponding result in the situation where it is decided to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, the stop operation means should be operated in the first stop mode. is executed, and a stop operation is performed according to the first predetermined notification to display the first stop result. In addition, when the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is a predetermined correspondence result in a situation where it is decided to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, the player is instructed to operate the stop operation means in the second stop mode. A recognizable second predetermined notification is executed, and the second stop result is displayed by performing a stop operation according to the second predetermined notification. As a result, it is possible to display the stop result indicating the type of advantageous gaming state that will occur after that by utilizing the situation where the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is the predetermined corresponding result. Therefore, even in a game in which the combination lottery process and the winning result are arbitrary, a predetermined stop result can be displayed at the time of transition to the advantageous game state even in a configuration where the transition to the advantageous game state can occur. In addition, it is possible to suggest the kind of advantageous game state by the predetermined stop result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein there are a plurality of types of the predetermined correspondence results.

According to the feature G2, since there are a plurality of types of predetermined correspondence results, the chances of displaying the predetermined stop result when shifting to the advantageous game state and the opportunities of suggesting the type of the advantageous game state are increased. becomes possible.

Feature G3. The winning response control means is configured to control whether the result of the lottery process for the combination is the predetermined response result and the stop result is the first stop result or the second stop result. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein a predetermined profit (replay profit) is given to the player.

According to the feature G3, the predetermined profit is given to the player regardless of whether the result of the winning lottery process is the predetermined corresponding result and the stop result of the variable display of the pattern is either the first stop result or the second stop result. . As a result, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above without affecting the profits given to the player.

Feature G4. The pattern display control means provides a third stop result ( (stop results including combinations of "Red 7" symbols, "Red 7" symbols and "BAR" symbols) can be displayed, and when the result of the lottery process for the combination is the specific response result, A fourth stop result (a stop result including a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols) is displayed based on the operation of the stop operation means in the second stop mode. make it possible to
The first stop result and the fourth stop result are stop results in which a combination of predetermined symbols ("Red 7" symbol, combination of "Red 7" symbol and "Red 7" symbol) are stopped and displayed,
The second stop result and the third stop result are stop results in which a combination of specific symbols (combination of "Red 7" symbol, "Red 7" symbol and "BAR" symbol) is stop-displayed;
The first predetermined notification control means executes the first predetermined notification when the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is the specific response result in a situation where it is determined to shift to the second advantageous gaming state. and
The second predetermined notification control means executes the second predetermined notification when the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is the specific response result in a situation where it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, characterized in that

According to the feature G4, not only when the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is a predetermined correspondence result, but also when a specific correspondence result is obtained, the transition to the advantageous game state occurs and the type of the advantageous game state. can be suggested by the result of stopping after the variable display of the pattern. Therefore, it is possible to provide many opportunities for suggestions based on the suspension result. In this case, the relationship between the content of the predetermined notification and the type of advantageous gaming state to be suggested is reversed between the case where the winning lottery process results in a predetermined correspondence result and the case in which a specific correspondence result results. ing. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the type of advantageous gaming state expected by the player will occur regardless of whether the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification occurs.

Feature G5. The first advantageous gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous gaming state,
The second predetermined notification control means executes the second predetermined notification when the result of the lottery process for the combination is the predetermined correspondence result in a situation where it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state. (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2512 in the main MPU 72),
In this gaming machine, when the result of the lottery process of the combination is the predetermined correspondence result in the situation where it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, when the second predetermined notification is executed, It is characterized by having a special notification executing means (a function of executing the processing of step S2703 in the main side MPU 72) for executing the special notification (reel effect) after the stop result of the game is displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4.

According to feature G5, in a game in which it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, the second stop result is stop-displayed as the stop result when the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is a predetermined lottery result. Special notification may be executed after suggesting a shift to a second advantageous gaming state with a lower advantage at . Thus, even if the second stop result is stop-displayed, it is possible for the player to expect that the special notification suggesting the shift to the first advantageous game state will occur afterwards.

Feature G6. The special notification execution means executes the second predetermined notification when the result of the lottery process for the combination is the predetermined correspondence result in a situation where it is determined to shift to the first advantageous gaming state. In this case, as the special notification, a special notification result is once displayed in which the first stop result is displayed after the fluctuation display of the pattern is started when the next game is started for the game, and then the special notification result is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature G5, wherein the variable display of the pattern is restarted.

According to the feature G6, even when the special notification is executed, the variable display of the pattern is used, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to the variable display of the pattern.

For the configuration of features G1 to G6, any one of features A1 to A17, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D15, features E1 to E8, features F1 to F7, and features G1 to G6 One or more configurations may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the features of the group of features F and the group of features G, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine, 31... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R... Reel, 41... Start lever, 42-44... Stop button, 61... Upper lamp, 62... Speaker, 63... Image display device, 72... Main side MPU , 92... production side MPU, 93... production side ROM, 94... production side RAM, 101... AT data table group, 102... addition period data table group, 111... first control area, 112... second control area, SC2... 2nd section, ST2... 1st CB state, ST3... 2nd CB state, ST5... AT state.

Claims (1)

Advantageous transition means for transitioning to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player;
means for terminating the advantageous game state when the remaining continuation reference number becomes "0" as the game is executed in the advantageous game state;
A lottery process for determining whether or not to increase the remaining continuation reference number and a value for increasing the remaining continuation reference number each time a lottery execution opportunity occurs until a lottery ending opportunity occurs in the grant target game an increase lottery means for executing an increase lottery process, which is at least one of the lottery processes to be performed;
The remaining continuation criteria based on the result of the increased lottery process executed until the notification opportunity occurs based on the occurrence of the notification opportunity in the situation where the lottery end opportunity has not occurred in the grant target game a predetermined notification means for notifying an increase in the number;
Determination means for determining whether the game is to be the grant target game when the game is started;
means for giving a corresponding number at the time of decision to the remaining continuation reference number when the deciding means decides to make the given game;
means for notifying that the corresponding number at the time of determination has been granted when the determination means determines that the game is to be the award target game;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images